Technical Specifications for:
Bozorth Hall Renovations – Phase 2
Issued For Bid
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FACILITIES PLANNING AND OPERATIONS
40 NORTH ACADEMY STREET
GLASSBORO, NJ 08028
February 12, 2016
PREPARED BY:
1835 MARKET STREET, SUITE 300
PHILADELPHIA, PA 19103
PHONE 215.979.7700
FAX 215.563.9765
Lammey & Giorgio, P.A.
Architecture • Planning • Project Management
215 Highland Avenue • Haddon Township, NJ 08108
Telephone 856.833.0010 • Facsimile 856.833.0470
William P. Lammey • NJ C6793
Anthony R. Giorgio • NJ O7626
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 02
024119
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03
033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 04
042000
UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 05
051200
053100
055000
055213
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
STEEL DECKING
METAL FABRICATIONS
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
DIVISION 06
061000
064023
ROUGH CARPENTRY
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
DIVISION 07
072100
075215
076200
078413
079200
THERMAL INSULATION
STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE
ROOFING
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08
081113
081416
084113
087100
088000
089000
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE & STOREFRONTS
DOOR HARDWARE
GLAZING
LOUVERS AND VENTS
DIVISION 09
092216
092900
095123
096513
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
GYPSUM BOARD
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
096519
096813
097200
099123
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
TILE CARPETING
WALL COVERINGS
INTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION 10
101100
101400
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
SIGNAGE
DIVISION 11
115213
PROJECTORS & PROJECTION SCREENS
DIVISION 12
122413
124813
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS
DIVISION 22
220517
220518
220523
220529
220553
220719
221116
221119
221316
221319
221329
221513
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
SANITARY WASTE SPECIALTIES
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING
DIVISION 23
230200
230513
230519
230529
230533
230548
230553
230593
230713
230800
230900
232113
232116
232123
232213
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
HEAT TRACING
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
MECHANICAL INSULATION
MECHANICAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
HYDRONIC PIPING
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
HYDRONIC PUMPS
STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
232216
232223
232300
233113
233300
233423
233600
233713
235700
237313
237323
238126
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
REFRIGERANT PIPING
METAL DUCTS
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
DIVISION 26
260519
260526
260529
260533
260544
260553
262416
262726
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PANELBOARDS
WIRING DEVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume;
materials subject to compliance with requirements.
B.
W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,
and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D.
Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the
structure.
1.
1.5
Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
B.
Welding certificates.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
C.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Cementitious materials.
Admixtures.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
Vapor retarders.
Joint-filler strips.
Repair materials.
D.
Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified
tolerances.
E.
Field quality-control reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
C.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1.
2.
3.
B.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature
range required by ACI 301.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing
water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of
ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is
Contractor's option.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE, GENERAL
A.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
2.
2.2
ACI 301.
ACI 117.
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1.
Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,
and as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.
Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge
sealed.
Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C.
Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding
specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic
concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
E.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
F.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed
concrete surface.
Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in
concrete surface.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn steel wire into flat sheets.
2.4
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with
ends square and free of burrs.
B.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.5
For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated
wire bar supports.
For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar
supports.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from
single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Cementitious Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.
Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595/C 595M, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag
cement.
Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source.
1.
2.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
D.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
E.
Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and
that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
F.
Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor
or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing
chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.
G.
Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-setaccelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a
protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
H.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.6
WATERSTOPS
A.
Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for
embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners,
intersections, and directional changes.
1.
Profile: Flat dumbbell with center bulb.
2.
Dimensions: 4 inches by 3/16 inch thick; nontapered.
B.
Chemically Resistant Flexible Waterstops: Thermoplastic elastomer rubber waterstops[ with
factory-installed metal eyelets], for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through
joints; resistant to oils, solvents, and chemicals. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and
directional changes.
C.
Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl
rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete,
3/4 by 1 inch.
2.7
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm)
thick.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.8
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C.
Water: Potable.
2.9
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or
ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
B.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1.
Types I and II, nonload bearing, Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or
freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
C.
Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily
fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
D.
Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick,
with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of
concrete or debris.
2.10
A.
REPAIR MATERIALS
Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.11
A.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended
hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by underlayment manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.12
A.
Footings: Normal-weight concrete.
4.
A.
2.14
A.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45.
Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding
high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.
Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch nominal
maximum aggregate size.
Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.13
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
1.
2.
3.
B.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Minimum Compressive Strength 4000 psi at 28 days.
Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45.
Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd.
Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
2.
Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1.
2.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent
loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.
K.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2
EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION
A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
3.3
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by
form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new
form-release agent.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
C.
3.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces
unless approved by Architect.
SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and
reshoring.
1.
B.
3.5
Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A.
Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.6
Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
reduce bond to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps
of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
3.7
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.
3.8
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1.
E.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.
Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate
or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections are completed.
B.
Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
1.
C.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mixture.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit
concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
2.
3.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have
begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
D.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.9
Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits
on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1.
3.10
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public views.
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,
carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-filmfinish coating system.
2.
Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 11
Burns Engineering, Inc.
C.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere
as indicated.
1.
3.11
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION
A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C.
Equipment Bases and Foundations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.12
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
Construct concrete bases 6 inches high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not
less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported
equipment unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete substrate.
Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper
attachment to supported equipment.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
D.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 12
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
b.
c.
3.13
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Water.
Continuous water-fog spray.
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
JOINT FILLING
A.
Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joints clean and dry.
3.14
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2
parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of
cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes
and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding
agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place
with bonding agent.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color.
Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before
proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than
surrounding surface.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 13
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.15
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor
elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,
square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without
coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and
loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Special Inspections: Engage qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Steel reinforcement placement.
Headed bolts and studs.
Verification of use of required design mixture.
Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50
cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
a.
2.
When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for
each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional
tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 14
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;one
test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete;
one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a.
b.
Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
7.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of
two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
8.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
END OF SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 15
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 16
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
Structural steel.
Grout.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck.
2.
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel
items not defined as structural steel.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in
AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction
without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1.
2.
Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
Include embedment Drawings.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
4.
C.
1.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.
Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs):
Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded
joint.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and testing agency.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D.
Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
E.
Survey of existing conditions.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.8
AISC 303.
AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.
AISC 360.
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1.
B.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1.
Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50.
B.
Channels, Angles, M -Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C.
Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B structural tubing.
E.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.
1.
2.
F.
2.2
Weight Class: Standard, unless noted otherwise.
Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural
bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened
carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
B.
Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Configuration: As shown.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C, as noted.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
Washers: ASTM F 436 ASTM F 436M, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C, as noted.
Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
2.
3.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.
Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
Finish: Plain Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C, as noted.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PRIMER
A.
2.4
Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
GROUT
A.
2.5
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged,
nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency
suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
FABRICATION
A.
Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according
to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.
1.
Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations.
B.
Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D.
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E.
Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wallopening framing to be attached to structural-steel frame. Straighten as required to provide
uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. Build up welded framing, weld
exposed joints continuously, and grind smooth.
F.
Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame. Weld
exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure
removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than
10 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to
pass through steel members.
1.
2.
3.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes
or enlarge holes by burning.
Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to
steel surfaces.
Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1.
B.
2.7
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
SHOP PRIMING
A.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1.
2.
3.
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches.
Surfaces to be field welded.
Galvanized surfaces.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter,
slag, or flux deposits.
C.
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and
exposed surfaces.
1.
D.
2.8
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPCPS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting
Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
GALVANIZING
A.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1.
2.
2.9
Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as
weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in
exterior walls.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being
fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C.
Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
to
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces
and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
ERECTION
A.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B.
Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces
of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface
of plates.
1.
2.
3.
Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.
C.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D.
Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in
permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
2.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E.
Splice members only where indicated.
F.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
G.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
3.4
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1.
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
2.
3.5
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Special Inspections:Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.
Verify weld materials and inspect welds.
Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.
B.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C.
Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
D.
Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.
In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not
accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or
missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1
for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool
cleaning.
END OF SECTION 051200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
1.3
Roof deck.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors.
2.
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel
shapes.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
1.4
Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans,
cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Welding certificates.
B.
Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural
Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
STEEL DECKING
053100 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof
covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to
AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members."
ROOF DECK
A.
Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI
Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the
following:
1.
Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS),
G60 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on,
rust-inhibitive primer.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
a.
Color: Manufacturer's standard.
Deck Profile: As indicated.
Profile Depth: As indicated.
Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.
Span Condition: Triple span or more.
Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
B.
Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically
driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C.
Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel
screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.
D.
Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E.
Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same
material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
F.
Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of
same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication
No. 31 for overhang and slab depth.
STEEL DECKING
053100 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
G.
Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,
finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick, with factorypunched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter.
I.
Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and
finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.
J.
Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material
and finish as deck, with 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch
(38-mm) minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.
K.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
L.
Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B.
Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.
C.
Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D.
Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side-lap interlocks.
E.
Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F.
Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to deck.
G.
Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
STEEL DECKING
053100 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
I.
3.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical
fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION
A.
Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface
diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm) long, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.
Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds
per deck unit at each support. Space welds 18 inches apart, maximum and 6 inches apart
in roof corners and perimeter, based on roof-area definitions in FMG Loss Prevention
Data Sheet 1-28.
Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.
B.
Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between
supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches, and as follows:
1.
Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds.
C.
End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches, with end joints as follows:
1.
D.
Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld flanges
to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches apart with at least one weld at each corner.
1.
E.
Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or
mechanically fasten.
Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end
closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.Weld
or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
1.
3.4
End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum or butted at Contractor's option.
Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field welds will be subject to inspection.
B.
Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck
with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
STEEL DECKING
053100 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of prime-painted
deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.
1.
C.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of
deck exposed to view.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 053100
STEEL DECKING
053100 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
STEEL DECKING
053100 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Sleeves.
Stack-sleeve fittings.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Grout.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
A.
Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded
steel collar; zinc coated.
C.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves:
coated, with plain ends.
D.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
E.
Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves:
welded longitudinal joint.
F.
Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with
nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
G.
Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping
ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
2.3
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
Approved Equal
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular
space between piping and sleeve.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
CALPICO, Inc.
Metraflex Company (The).
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Proco Products, Inc.
Sealing Elements: NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Composite.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements.
GROUT
A.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
B.
Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B.
For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1.
C.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls
are constructed.
1.
2.
Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP
sleeves.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
3.
D.
3.
3.2
Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal
system.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1.
2.
E.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants
specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1.
2.
3.
Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor
level.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
5.
B.
3.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if
ring is specified.
Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal
pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 7."
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service
piping entries into building.
B.
Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for
sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a
watertight seal.
3.4
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A.
Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1.
Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal
system.
1)
b.
Piping NPS and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1)
2.
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal
system.
1)
b.
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system]
[Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
1)
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Interior Partitions:
a.
b.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.
END OF SECTION 220517
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Escutcheons.
Floor plates.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and setscrew
fastener.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and
spring-clip fasteners.
C.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.
2.2
FLOOR PLATES
A.
One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.
B.
Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220518 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B.
Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping
and with OD that completely covers opening.
1.
Escutcheons for New Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished, chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with roughbrass finish.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass
finish.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.
C.
Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.
D.
Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD
that completely covers opening.
1.
2.
3.2
New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.
Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.
END OF SECTION 220518
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220518 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Bronze ball valves.
Bronze swing check valves.
Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and
schedules.
Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for valves applicable only to this piping.
Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for valves applicable only to this
piping.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CWP: Cold working pressure.
B.
EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
D.
NRS: Nonrising stem.
E.
OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F.
RS: Rising stem.
G.
SWP: Steam working pressure.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B.
ASME Compliance:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.6
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
2.
C.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
Block check valves in either closed or open position.
Maintain valve end protection.
Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A.
Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B.
All valves shall be certified Lead Free. Where bronze is noted in the subsequent specification it
shall refer to lead free silicone bronze alloy.
C.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
D.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Valve Actuator Types:
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
3.
Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.
Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.
Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Gate Valves: With rising stem.
Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation.
Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.
Valve-End Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.
Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves.
Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5
plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.
Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size
and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.
Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:
1.
2.
G.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Stem and Disc: Bronze.
Packing: Asbestos free.
Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.
BRONZE BALL VALVES
A.
Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
SWP Rating: 150 psig.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
Body Design: Two piece.
Body Material: Bronze.
Ends: Soldered.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Seats: PTFE or TFE.
Stem: Bronze.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Port: Full.
BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4.
CWP Rating: 200 psig
Body Design: Horizontal flow.
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
Ends: Soldered.
Disc: PTFE or TFE.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E.
Install chainwheels on operators for ball, butterfly, gate, globe and plug valves NPS 4 and larger
and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.
F.
Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1.
3.3
Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1.
2.
Shutoff Service: Ball, or gate valves.
Pump-Discharge Check Valves:
a.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with nonmetallic disc.
B.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1.
3.5
For Copper Tubing, NPS 3 and Smaller: Soldered ends.
DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Pipe NPS 3 and Smaller:
1.
2.
Ball Valves Two piece, full port bronze with bronze trim.
Bronze Swing Check Valves Class 125, nonmetallic disc.
END OF SECTION 220523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Metal pipe hangers and supports.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
Metal framing systems.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
Pipe positioning systems.
Equipment supports.
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze
hangers for pipe and equipment supports.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design:
Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
2.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following; include Product Data for components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Trapeze pipe hangers.
Metal framing systems.
Fiberglass strut systems.
Pipe stands.
Equipment supports.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
Copper Pipe Hangers:
1.
2.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated
components.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A.
2.3
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and Ubolts.
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
Flex-Strut Inc.
GS Metals Corp.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.
Wesanco, Inc.
Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple
parallel pipes.
Standard: MFMA-4.
Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.
Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel
slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized.
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B.
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate
with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
C.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate
with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.
D.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
E.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
F.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
2.5
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
B.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
2.6
PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A.
2.7
Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for
positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
2.8
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbonsteel shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel:
galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange
for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated
trapeze pipe hangers.
1.
2.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe
hangers.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and
support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
2.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste
piping connections to each plumbing fixture.
G.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
H.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
I.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
J.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
K.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
L.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
M.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
N.
Insulated Piping:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.2
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a.
4.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a.
3.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.5
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
B.
3.6
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing
systems and attachments for general service applications.
F.
Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.
G.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
H.
Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
I.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes
NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow offcenter closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary
pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of
non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steelpipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and
with U-bolt to retain pipe.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange.
Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small
horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to
NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition
to expansion and contraction.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
J.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
K.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4
to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
L.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
b.
c.
13.
14.
15.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
M.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
N.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with
springs.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a.
b.
c.
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
O.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
P.
Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Q.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
R.
Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and
waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
END OF SECTION 220529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220529 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Equipment labels.
Warning signs and labels.
Pipe labels.
Stencils.
Valve tags.
Warning tags.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
D.
Valve numbering scheme.
E.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
A.
Metal Labels for Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having
predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch
(A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers
where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section
number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in
operation and maintenance data.
2.2
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B.
Letter Color: Black.
C.
Background Color: Yellow.
D.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch.
F.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
G.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
H.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
I.
2.3
Label Content:
instructions.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
PIPE LABELS
A.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B.
Pre-tensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1.
2.
2.4
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
VALVE TAGS
A.
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch numbers.
1.
2.
B.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1.
2.5
Tag Material: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
Fasteners: Brass beaded chain.
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
WARNING TAGS
A.
Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card
stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches.
Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO
NOT OPERATE."
Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 9.
B.
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1.
Domestic Water Piping:
a.
b.
3.4
Background Color: Green (Cold); Yellow (Hot).
Letter Color: Black.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering
hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List
tagged valves in a valve schedule.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:
1.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Cold Water: 2 inches round.
Hot Water: 2 inches round.
Valve-Tag Color:
a.
b.
Cold Water: Natural.
Hot Water: Natural.
Letter Color:
a.
b.
3.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Cold Water: Black.
Hot Water: Black
WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required.
END OF SECTION 220553
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220553 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Domestic cold-water piping.
Domestic hot-water piping.
Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
C.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1.
Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.
Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for
installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for
maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation
Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Underground
Piping Insulation Schedule" and "Equipment Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating
materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
2.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied
jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
C.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-127.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85-60/85-70.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for
bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-82.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85-20.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1.
B.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry
film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 30-80/30-90.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
Approved Equal
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-10.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 550.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 46-50.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.
Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-76.
Approved Equal.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: White.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
2.
2.6
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.
Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 11.5 mils
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive;
suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape.
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Compac Corporation; 130.
Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
Width: 2 inches
Thickness: 6 mils
Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 500 percent.
Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS
A.
Bands:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping and Seals.
Approved Equal
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015
inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
B.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.
C.
Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
C & F Wire.
Approved Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a
corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1.
2.
Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an
epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F
Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods
for operating temperature range.
Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300
deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating
materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
C.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing.
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
Comply with
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
4.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
4.
5.
For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
P.
For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations:
penetrations.
1.
Install insulation continuously through roof
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush
with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations:
continuously through wall penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least 2 inches.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations:
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1.
F.
Comply with requirements in Division 7 for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.5
Install insulation
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
Comply with requirements in
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape
insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1.
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
D.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 11
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
C.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
D.
3.8
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent
of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe for each pipe service
defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.9
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
Underground piping.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Domestic Cold Water:
1.
NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a.
2.
NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a.
B.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I with ASJ: 1/2 inch thick.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I with ASJ: 1 inch thick.
Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 12
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a.
2.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I with ASJ: 1/2 inch thick.
NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I with ASJ: 1 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 220719
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 13
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 - 14
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
System purging and disinfecting activities report.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging
to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of water
service.
Do not interrupt water service without Owner's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
2.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping
components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, drawn temper.
B.
Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
C.
Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
D.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
E.
Copper Unions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
MSS SP-123.
Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.
Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.
Solder-joint or threaded ends.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
1.
2.
AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic
and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.
Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.
D.
Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
Calpico, Inc.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Central Plastics Company.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Non-conducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EARTHWORK
A.
3.2
Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and
backfilling.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic
water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C.
Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600
and AWWA M41.
D.
Install underground ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or
AWWA C105/A21.5.
E.
Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
F.
Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with
requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties."
G.
Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
H.
Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
I.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
J.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
K.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
L.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
M.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
N.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
O.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
P.
Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
Q.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
R.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping."
S.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.3
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
C.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
D.
Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed
Joints" chapter.
E.
Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube.
Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and
thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
G.
3.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of
both piping systems.
DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.5
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529
"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1.
2.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
D.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 3: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
E.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
F.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
G.
Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.
H.
Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and
maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D.
Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect
to the following:
1.
2.
3.7
Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and
installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
Piping Inspections:
a.
b.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction:
1)
2)
c.
d.
2.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing
or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests
specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance
with requirements.
Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests
or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Piping Tests:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered
or concealed before it was tested.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source
and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects that must be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
B.
Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9
ADJUSTING
A.
Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
Open throttling valves to proper setting.
Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.10
A.
Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping
to provide hot-water flow in each branch.
Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
CLEANING
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
a.
b.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1)
c.
d.
e.
B.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are
not prescribed, follow procedures described below:
a.
b.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
C.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of watersample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.11
A.
PIPING SCHEDULE
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1.
B.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 3 and larger, shall be one of the following:
1.
3.12
A.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; cast or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and
brazed joints.
VALVE SCHEDULE
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1.
2.
B.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; cast or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and
soldered joints.
Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 3 and smaller.
Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
END OF SECTION 221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221116 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Vacuum breakers.
Backflow preventers.
Water pressure-reducing valves.
Strainers.
Drain valves.
Air vents.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.
1.
1.4
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61.
B.
All devices shall be certified Lead Free. Where bronze is noted in the subsequent specification it
shall refer to lead free silicone bronze alloy.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.3
Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise
indicated.
VACUUM BREAKERS
A.
Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Standard: ASSE 1001.
Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.
Body: Bronze.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
Finish: Rough bronze.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
Standard: ASSE 1011.
Body: Bronze, non-removable, with manual drain.
Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Finish: Chrome or nickel plated
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
c.
d.
Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.
Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged
ends on inlet and outlet.
Wye Strainer (See section below)
Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
Standard: ASSE 1013.
Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.
Body: Lead Free Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; steel with interior lining that complies
with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved and stainless steel trim and seats for NPS 21/2 and larger.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.
Accessories:
a.
b.
B.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc.
Standard: ASSE 1052.
Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water back pressure.
Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4.
Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
Capacity: At least 3-gpm flow.
WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A.
Water Regulators:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
Standard: ASSE 1003.
Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
5.
2.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.
DRAIN VALVES
A.
Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.
Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.
Size: NPS 3/4.
Body: Copper alloy.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7
and cap with brass chain.
Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves.
Pressure Rating: 200-psig minimum CWP or Class 125.
Size: NPS 3/4.
Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze.
Drain: NPS 1/8 side outlet with cap.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.
Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
B.
Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and
outlet.
C.
Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets
and with shutoff valve on outlet.
1.
Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.
E.
Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressurereducing valve, solenoid valve and pump.
F.
Install outlet boxes recessed in wall or surface mounted on wall. Install 2-by-4-inch fireretardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements
for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."
G.
Install hose stations with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with thermometer on outlet.
1.
Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. Install 2by-4-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs.
Comply with requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000
"Rough Carpentry."
H.
Size and install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
I.
Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for
proper flow.
J.
Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down
toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.
K.
Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of
1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding
for Electrical Systems."
B.
Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.
3.3
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or
sign on or near each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.
Water pressure-reducing valves.
Outlet boxes.
Hose stations.
Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
6.
B.
3.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Trap-seal primer systems.
Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having
jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.
B.
Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B.
Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
C.
Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION 221119
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221119 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Pipe, tube, and fittings.
Specialty pipe fittings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
1.4
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
Waste, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary
waste service.
Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Owner's written
permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.
B.
Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,
solder-joint fittings.
C.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.
2.3
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
B.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns
and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
C.
Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
1.
2.
D.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
1.
2.
2.4
Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Transition Couplings:
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in
OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with
pipes to be joined.
Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping
system fitting.
Shielded, Non-pressure Transition Couplings:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.
Approved Equal
Standard: ASTM C 1460.
Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant
outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism
on each end.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
C.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
G.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
H.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
J.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
K.
Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
L.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
M.
Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1.
Install encasement on
AWWA C105/A 21.5.
underground
piping
according
to
ASTM A 674
N.
Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code.
O.
Install stainless-steel piping according to ASME A112.3.1 and applicable plumbing code.
P.
Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
Q.
Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.
R.
Install force mains at elevations indicated.
S.
Plumbing Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
or
Install backwater valves in sanitary waster gravity-flow piping.
Comply with
requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping
Specialties."
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with
closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with
requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping
Specialties."
Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for
drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
T.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
U.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
V.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
Plumbing Piping."
W.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.2
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
B.
Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.
C.
Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.
D.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E.
Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828.
ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.
F.
Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
and fittings according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Use
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.
SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Transition Couplings:
1.
2.
Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.
In Drainage Piping: Shielded, non-pressure transition couplings.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
3.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
General valve installation requirements are specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves
for Plumbing Piping."
B.
Shutoff Valves:
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.5
Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.
Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller.
Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage
pump discharge.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in
Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.
Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.
Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:
a.
b.
c.
6.
7.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B.
Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.
C.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
E.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
F.
NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-rod.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
G.
Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.
H.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
I.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.6
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover
flush with floor.
Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary
Waste Piping Specialties."
Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and
union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
D.
Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of
equipment.
E.
Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.7
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification
specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.8
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B.
Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.
C.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside
leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug ventstack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into
piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap
of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence
of published procedures, as follows:
1.
2.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before
it was tested.
Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
4.
3.9
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.10
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 2-1/2 and smaller shall be the following:
1.
C.
Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 3 and larger shall be the following:
1.
D.
Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
Aboveground, vent piping NPS 2-1/2 and smaller shall be the following:
1.
E.
Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.
Aboveground, vent piping NPS 3 and larger shall be the following:
1.
Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
END OF SECTION 221316
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
221316 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Cleanouts.
Floor drains.
Roof flashing assemblies.
Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
Flashing materials.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B.
FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.
C.
FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
D.
HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
E.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
F.
PP: Polypropylene plastic.
G.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
characteristics, and accessories for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Include rated capacities, operating
FOG disposal systems.
Grease interceptors.
Grease removal devices.
Oil interceptors.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.
1.
1.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary
piping specialty components.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B.
Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANOUTS
A.
Exposed Metal Cleanouts:
1.
ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
Josam Company.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
Tyler Pipe.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4)
5)
B.
ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Josam Company.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
Tyler Pipe.
Watts Drainage Products.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Watts Drainage Products.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
Metal Floor Cleanouts:
1.
C.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Josam Company; Josam Div.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Watts Drainage Products.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.
Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, drilled-and-threaded cast-iron plug.
Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
Wall Access: Square, stainless-steel wall-installation frame and cover.
FLOOR DRAINS
A.
Cast-Iron Floor Drains:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
Josam Company; Josam Div.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Watts Drainage Products.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Standard: ASME A112.6.3.
Pattern: Floor drain.
Body Material: Cast iron.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Outlet: Bottom, Caulked
Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Epoxy.
Sediment Bucket: Removable 8” diameter.
Top Shape: Round.
Dimensions of Top or Strainer: 15” diameter, deep sump floor drain with 12” top and ½”
slot width.
Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy-Duty
Trap Material: Cast iron.
Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap.
Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.
MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Open Drains:
1.
2.
B.
Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where
required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
Size: Same as connected waste piping.
Deep-Seal Traps:
1.
2.
Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping
and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.
Size: Same as connected waste piping.
a.
b.
C.
Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:
1.
2.
D.
Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal
primer valve connection.
Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.
Air-Gap Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.
Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between
installed inlet and outlet piping.
Body: Bronze or cast iron.
Inlet: Opening in top of body.
Outlet: Larger than inlet.
Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect
waste piping.
Expansion Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.
Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.
End Connections: Matching connected piping.
Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights
and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.
Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.
Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.
B.
Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
C.
Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
D.
Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
E.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.5
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A.
Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ProSet Systems Inc.
Approved Equal
Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene
O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap
for plug.
Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout
deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to
remove valve cover for servicing.
B.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless
larger cleanout is indicated.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for
larger piping.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C.
For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
D.
For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch
total depression.
Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1inch total depression.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
F.
Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
G.
Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
H.
Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor
penetrations.
I.
Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor.
J.
Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
K.
Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.
1.
2.
L.
Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.
Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping
discharge into sanitary drainage system.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
M.
Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof
membrane.
N.
Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.
O.
Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.
P.
Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
Q.
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's
written installation instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.
Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
R.
Install downspout boots at grade with top 18 inches above grade. Secure to building wall.
S.
Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping
installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.3
FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1.
2.
B.
Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.
Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and
skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.
Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches
around specialty.
C.
Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D.
Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E.
Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter-flashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 7.
F.
Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
G.
Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.5
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and
to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221319
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
221319 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 221329 - SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Submersible sewage pumps.
Sewage-pump basins and basin covers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data:
maintenance manuals.
For pumps and controls, to include in operation and
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B.
Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C.
Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
221329 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
A.
Submersible, Quick-Disconnect, Double-Seal Sewage Pumps:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested sewage-pump unit with guide-rail supports.
Pump type: Submersible, end-suction, single-stage, close-coupled, overhung-impeller,
centrifugal sewage pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.
Pump Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet, and discharge fittings for connection to guiderail support.
Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A cast
iron and stainless steel, two vane semi-open, non-clog, design with pump out vanes for
mechanical seal protection, keyed and secured to shaft.
Pump and Motor Shaft: 300 series Stainless steel keyed design, with factory-sealed,
grease-lubricated ball bearings.
Seals: Silicone carbide vs. silicone carbide outer seal and ceramic vs. carbon inner seal,
stainless steel metal parts, BUNA-N elastomers. Upper and lower shaft seals are
positioned independently and are separated by an oil filled chamber.
Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor and moisture alarm.
Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection; lifting
eye or lug; and three-conductor, waterproof power cable of length required and with
grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
a.
10.
ABS Pumps Inc.
Goulds Pumps; ITT Corporation.
Grundfos Pumps Corp.
Motor Housing Fluid: Oil.
Controls:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X.
Switch Type: Mechanically activated, wide angle float switch with heavy duty
water tight cable
Automatic Alternator: Start pumps on successive cycles and start multiple pumps
if one cannot handle load.
Float Guides: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater
than 60 inches.
High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell;
120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
221329 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
11.
Control-Interface Features:
a.
Building Automation System Interface: Auxiliary contacts in pump controls for
interface to building automation system and capable of providing the following:
1)
2)
3)
2.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
On-off status of pump.
High Level Alarm status.
Pump Failure to Start
SEWAGE-PUMP BASINS AND BASIN COVERS
A.
Basins: Factory-fabricated, watertight, cylindrical, basin sump with top flange and sidewall
openings for pipe connections.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Basin Covers: Fabricate metal cover with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings; for
access to pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power
cables.
1.
C.
Material: Cast iron.
Reinforcement: Mounting plates for pumps, fittings, guide-rail supports if used, and
accessories.
Anchor Flange: Same material as or compatible with basin sump, cast in or attached to
sump, in location and of size required to anchor basin in concrete slab.
Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic for basins installed
in foot-traffic areas.
Capacities and Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
Diameter: 24 inches
Depth: 30 inches.
Inlet No. 1 (Sanitary Inlet):
a.
b.
c.
4.
Inlet No. 2 (Fresh Air Intake):
a.
b.
c.
5.
Drainage Pipe Size: 3 NPS.
Bottom of Sump to Centerline: Contractor to verify in field
Type: Hubbed outside.
Drainage Pipe Size: 3 NPS
Bottom of Sump to Centerline: Contractor to verify in field
Type: Hubbed outside.
Sidewall Outlet:
a.
b.
c.
Discharge Pipe Size: 2 NPS.
Bottom of Sump to Centerline: Contractor to verify in field
Type: Threaded Galvanized Steel.
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
221329 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Cover Material: Steel with bituminous coating.
Cover Diameter: 42, but not less than outside diameter of basin top flange.
Manhole Required in Cover: Yes.
Vent Size: 2 NPS.
Discharge Piping: Galvanized, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, steel pipe with ASME B16.4
threaded fittings.
MOTORS
A.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 220513 "Common Motor Requirements
for Plumbing Equipment."
1.
B.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Motors for submersible pumps shall be hermetically sealed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EARTHWORK
A.
3.2
Excavation and filling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
EXAMINATION
A.
3.3
Examine roughing-in for plumbing piping to verify actual locations of sanitary drainage and
vent piping connections before sewage pump installation.
INSTALLATION
A.
Pump Installation Standards:
1.
2.
Comply with HI 1.4 for installation of centrifugal pumps.
Comply with HI 3.1-3.5 for installation of progressing-cavity sewage pumps.
B.
Wiring Method: Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
C.
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess
and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars
and distribution spools.
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
221329 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent
Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D.
Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
3.7
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Adjust control set points.
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
221329 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.8
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps.
END OF SECTION 221329
SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
221329 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 230200 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.2
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
Transition fittings.
Dielectric fittings.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
Sleeves.
Escutcheons.
Grout.
Mechanical demolition.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
Painting and finishing.
Concrete bases.
Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
1.3
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
C.
1.6
Transition fittings.
Dielectric fittings.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
Escutcheons.
Welding certificates.
1.
2.
1.5
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in
writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are
appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,
equipment shall comply with requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of
dirt, debris, and moisture.
B.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight.
bending.
Support to prevent sagging and
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress
of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
C.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring
access that are concealed behind finished surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.
2.2
2.3
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
the manufacturers specified.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
joining methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed
below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness
unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
b.
2.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze
flanges.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel
flanges.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
E.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.
according to ASTM B 813.
F.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for
refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H.
Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Include water-flushable flux
ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to
and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type
coupling.
Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:
CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with
manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert,
and one solvent-cement-joint end.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
C.
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.
JCM Industries.
Smith-Blair, Inc.
Viking Johnson.
Eslon Thermoplastics.
Or approved equal
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11
equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint
end.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
D.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union.
Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
E.
NIBCO INC.
NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.
Or approved equal
Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Non-pressure Drainage Piping:
ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and
corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.5
Thompson Plastics, Inc.
Or approved equal
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
Fernco, Inc.
Mission Rubber Company.
Plastic Oddities, Inc.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,
solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
D.
Capitol Manufacturing Co.
Central Plastics Company.
Eclipse, Inc.
Epco Sales, Inc.
Hart Industries, International, Inc.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Co.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
b.
c.
d.
E.
Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges,
full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves,
phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
F.
Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
Calpico, Inc.
Lochinvar Corp.
Or approved equal
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225
deg F.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.6
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
Calpico, Inc.
Central Plastics Company.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Dielectric Couplings:
Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and non-corrosive,
thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225
deg F.
1.
G.
Central Plastics Company.
Epco Sales, Inc.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Perfection Corp.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Victaulic Co. of America.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A.
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
Calpico, Inc.
Metraflex Co.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for
each sealing element.
SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
2.8
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to
closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that
completely covers opening.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chromeplated finish.
C.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1.
D.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
E.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
F.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and
chrome-plated finish.
G.
One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H.
Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.9
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
GROUT
A.
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement
grout.
1.
2.
3.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, non-corrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A.
Refer to Division 1 for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components
indicated to be removed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
3.2
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with
same or compatible piping material.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and
plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal
capacity and quality.
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the
following:
1.
New Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deeppattern type.
Chrome-Plated Piping:
One-piece, cast-brass type with polished
chrome-plated finish.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Onepiece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Onepiece, stamped-steel type.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or
split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
set screw or spring clips.
Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece,
floor-plate type.
Existing Piping: Use the following:
a.
Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated
finish.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type concealed or exposedrivet hinge and spring clips.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Splitcasting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Splitplate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting,
cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate,
stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type
with polished chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type.
Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting,
floor-plate type.
M.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor
and roof slabs.
O.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
2.
3.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment
areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend castiron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if
ring is specified.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a.
b.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsumboard partitions.
c.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install
section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished
floor level. Refer to Division 7 specifications for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and
location of joint. Refer to Division 7 specifications for materials and installation.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
P.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
2.
3.
Q.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.
Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
3.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.
Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.
R.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to
Division 7 specifications for materials.
S.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
T.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughingin requirements.
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated,
to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 11
Burns Engineering, Inc.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry
seal threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded
or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt
threads.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number
PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
PVC Non-pressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
PVC to ABS Non-pressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
J.
Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K.
Plastic Non-pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L.
PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth
or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1.
2.
M.
3.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join
according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 12
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
3.6
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights
are not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement
of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum
interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
PAINTING
A.
3.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Concrete Bases:
Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment
manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches
larger in both directions than supported unit.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the
base.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extended through
concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Division 3.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 13
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.8
3.9
3.10
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and
anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood members.
C.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
GROUTING
A.
Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 230200
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
230200 - 14
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Motor controllers.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
B.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
230513 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C.
Service Factor: 1.15.
D.
Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1.
2.
For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E.
Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F.
Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G.
Bearings:
loading.
H.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I.
Insulation: Class F.
J.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
2.
K.
2.4
Re-greasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse-width modulated inverters.
Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.
Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
230513 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A.
Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Permanent-split capacitor.
Split phase.
Capacitor start, inductor run.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B.
Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C.
Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
D.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 230513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
230513 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
230513 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Liquid-in-glass thermometers.
Thermowells.
Dial-type pressure gages.
Gage attachments.
Test plugs.
Energy Metering
Airflow Measuring Devices.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
maintenance manuals.
For meters and gages to include in operation and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A.
Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC
230519 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
Trerice, H. O. Co. BX-Type
Weiss Instruments, Inc., Navy Class
Ashcroft Equal
Standard: ASME B40.200.
Case: Cast aluminum; 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.
Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.
Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and red organic liquid.
Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings
graduated in deg F and deg C.
Window: Clear Double Strength Glass.
Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.
a.
b.
9.
10.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud.
Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.
DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS
A.
2.3
Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment to air duct and made to hold
thermometer stem.
THERMOWELLS
A.
Thermowells:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
2.4
Standard: ASME B40.200.
Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.
Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.
Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.
External Threads: NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.
Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of
thermometer connection.
Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.
PRESSURE GAGES
A.
Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC
230519 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Weiss Instruments, Inc., Series 088
Trerice, H. O. Co. Equal
Ashcroft Equal
Standard: ASME B40.100.
Case: Sealed type; cast aluminum; 6-inch nominal diameter.
Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottomoutlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
Dial: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi
and kPa.
Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
Window: Glass.
Ring: Stainless steel.
Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.
GAGE ATTACHMENTS
A.
Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type
surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.
B.
Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/2 pipe threads.
C.
Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
2.6
TEST PLUGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Ashcroft Inc..
Trerice, H. O. Co.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B.
Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
C.
Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include
extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.
D.
Thread Size: NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
E.
Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
F.
Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC
230519 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
ENERGY METERING
A.
Magnetic Flowmeters (Chilled Water):
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Description: Magnetic flowmeter with remote flowtube and converter. Converter shall
have operating panel and display. Meter shall be furnished with 30 feet of signal cable
and termination kit.
Installation: Chilled water energy meter shall be installed on the primary chilled water
supply or return piping after the isolation valves from the primary chilled water system.
Each flow meter shall be accompanied by a temperature transmitter in both the primary
and chilled water supply and return piping. Insulate in line meters with removable covers.
Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system
served.
Temperature Transmitter (Yokogawa YTA 110 or Rosemount Equal):
a.
b.
c.
B.
Yokogawa, Model AXF.
Rosemount Equal
Element: Tip Sensitive 100ohm RTD TCR 0.00385.
Spring loaded holder.
Thermowell: ¾ inch or ½ inch, 316SS, and sized to enter ½ the installed pipe
diameter; add extension nipple to extend beyond insulation. Thermowell shall be
filled at least 1/3 full with heat conducting grease as manufactured by Dow
Chemical.
Vortex Flowmeter (Steam):
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Yokogawa, Model DY.
Rosemount
Description: Flanged Vortex flowmeter with remote flowtube and converter. Converter
shall have operating panel and display. Meter shall be furnished with 30 feet of signal
cable and termination kit.
Installation: Steam energy meters shall be installed on the high pressure side of the
incoming service, prior to the PRV station (where served by high pressure steam). Energy
metering must compensate for temperature and pressure. Steam meters shall have a
flanged connection at both the meter and outside reducers before transitioning to meter
line size. Each flow meter shall be accompanied by a temperature and pressure
transmitter installed downstream. Pressure transmitter shall be mounted vertically above
the pipe penetration and have an isolation valve followed by a pigtail, a second isolation
valve and a port for calibration. Insulate in line meters with removable covers.
Temperature Transmitter (Yokogawa YTA 110 or Rosemount Equal):
a.
b.
Element: Tip Sensitive 100ohm RTD TCR 0.00385.
Spring loaded holder.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC
230519 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
c.
5.
Thermowell: ¾ inch or ½ inch, 316SS, and sized to enter ½ the installed pipe
diameter; add extension nipple to extend beyond insulation. Thermowell shall be
filled at least 1/3 full with heat conducting grease as manufactured by Dow
Chemical.
Pressure Transmitter (Yokogawa EJA 530E or Rosemount Equal)
a.
C.
Valve in Line Manifold (Yokogawa M25 or Approved Equal)
Flow Computers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Description: The flow meter, temperature transmitters, (and pressure transmitters for
steam meters) shall be connected to a local Flow Computer, Kessler Elllis model ES-749
or approved equal.
Installation: The meter shall be located within 20’-0” of the meter and installed at 5’-6”
above the floor on a column, wall, or constructed support stand only.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X. Where meters are installed adjacent to one another, multiple flow
computers may be housed in a single enclosure.
University will engage their approved integrator to provide graphics and communications
to the University’s SCADA system and Energy Management System. At a minimum the
following information will have the capability to be logged and trended in 15 minute
increments through the SCADA system:
a.
Chilled Water:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
b.
Instantaneous Flow (GPM)
Cumulative Chilled Water Use (Gallons)
Instantaneous Energy Flow (BTU/hr, Ton-hrs)
Cumulative Energy Use (mmBTUs, Ton-days)
Supply Water Temperature
Return Water Temperature
Differential Temperature
Steam:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.8
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Steam Supply (Lbs)
Instantaneous Mass Flow (Lbs/Hr)
Totalized Mass Consumption (Lbs)
Steam pressure and temperature compensation
AIRFLOW MEASURING DEVICES
A.
Airflow Measuring Stations (RTU-1):
1.
2.
3.
Airflow measuring stations shall control damper positions fan speed via DDC system and
variable frequency drives for VAV systems.
Each unit shall include three (3) airflow measuring stations; one (1) each in the supply
and return fan inlets and one at the outside air unit opening.
The stations shall interface with the DDC system which will index the supply and return
air fans as required.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC
230519 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
The metering devices shall be located to read flows from a minimum of 15% to 110% of
design airflow with an accuracy of +/- 5% or better. The manufacturer shall be consulted
regarding device locations and anticipated air velocity profiles at the inlets to the stations.
The measuring devices shall be hermetically sealed “bead in glass” thermistors as
manufactured by EBTRON Model GTA116-P.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping
tees.
B.
Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if
required to match sizes.
C.
Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.
D.
Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.
E.
Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
F.
Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.
G.
Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the
most readable position.
H.
Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).
I.
Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.
J.
Install test plugs in piping tees.
K.
Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.
L.
Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements
and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.
M.
Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.
N.
Install airflow measuring stations in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
O.
Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths of
pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions.
P.
Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.
Q.
Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.
R.
Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC
230519 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
S.
Install thermometers in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
T.
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler.
Primary Chilled Water Supply and Return Lines
Secondary Chilled Water Supply and Return Lines
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units.
Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger.
Inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank.
Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts.
Install pressure gages in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Upstream and downstream of each pressure-reducing valve.
Suction and discharge of each pump.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance
of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
B.
Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters.
C.
Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
D.
Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
3.4
THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A.
Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F and minus 20 to plus 50 deg C.
B.
Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 20 to 240 deg F and 0 to 150 deg C.
C.
Scale Range for Air Ducts: 0 to 150 deg F and minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.
3.5
PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A.
Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 30 psi and 0 to 240 kPa.
B.
Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 30 psi and 0 to 240 kPa.
C.
Scale Range for LP Steam Piping: 0 to 30 psi and 0 to 240 kPa.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC
230519 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Scale Range for HP Steam Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.
END OF SECTION 230519
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC
230519 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping
and equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
Metal framing systems.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
Pipe stands.
Pipe positioning systems.
Equipment supports.
Division 23 Section "Vibration Controls for HVAC" for vibration isolation
devices.
Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
DEFINITIONS
A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B.
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers
and Supports."
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
C.
Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment, and obtain
approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.5
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
Fiberglass pipe hangers.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Powder-actuated fastener systems.
Pipe positioning systems.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication
and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
Equipment supports.
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code --Steel."
B.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1.
2.
2.2
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to
Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and
support types.
B.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pre-galvanized or hot dipped.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for
support of bearing surface of piping.
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made
from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel
channels and other components.
B.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
Empire Industries, Inc.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
Anvil/Grinnell Corp.
National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
Tolco Inc.
C.
A.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.
GS Metals Corp.
Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
Tolco Inc.
Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
Hilti, Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
d.
e.
B.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.6
A.
Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning
piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.
B.
Available Manufacturers:
C & S Mfg. Corp.
HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises.
Samco Stamping, Inc.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
2.8
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Empire Industries, Inc.
Hilti, Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Powers Fasteners.
PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
1.
2.
3.
2.7
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Powers Fasteners.
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structuralsteel shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel:
galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
Properties: Non-staining, non-corrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping
systems and equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment
that will not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F
pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3):
For
suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4
inches of insulation.
Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2
to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to
allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension
of non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS
Type 11): For suspension of non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension
of non-insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
G.
2.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,
with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt
to retain pipe.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for
pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30,
from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might
occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2
to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but
vertical adjustment is not necessary.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes,
NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be
required in addition to expansion and contraction.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
H.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy
loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe
rings.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various
types of building attachments.
Steel Weld-less Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping
installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with barjoist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange
of beams, channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange
of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required
tangent to flange edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
b.
c.
13.
14.
15.
J.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to
linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
K.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids
with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping
movement.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll
hanger with springs.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or
thermal expansion in piping systems.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping
system from hanger.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of
piping system from base support.
Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of
piping system from trapeze support.
Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected
equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and loadadjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a.
b.
c.
3.2
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.
L.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
M.
Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are
not specified in piping system Sections.
N.
Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in
concrete construction.
O.
Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply
and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
B.
Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange
for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated
trapeze pipe hangers.
1.
2.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe
size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above
for individual pipe hangers.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
C.
Fiberglass Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and
MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
D.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
E.
Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.
F.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
G.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
2.
H.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs
less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install
fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured.
Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Pipe Stand Installation:
1.
2.
Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and
mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand
and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof
Accessories" for curbs.
I.
Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and
waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section
"Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fixtures.
J.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers,
and other accessories.
K.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
L.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
M.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
N.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, and
at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
O.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
P.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and
ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.
Q.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor
barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining
insulation.
a.
3.
3.3
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
6.
7.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel
weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on
rollers.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a.
4.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power
piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.
Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to
support equipment above floor.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.4
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
3.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to
achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
PAINTING
A.
Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B.
Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 painting
Sections.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 230529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 11
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230529 - 12
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 230533 - HEAT TRACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the City, Standard Contract Requirements, Supplements to
the City Standard Contract Requirements, Special Provisions and other Division 1 through 26
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes heat tracing with the following:
1.
1.3
Self-regulating low temperature heating cables for cooling tower condenser water piping,
overflow and drain piping and cold water make-up piping exposed beneath the cooling
tower on the exterior of the building..
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each type of product indicated.
1.
2.
Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for
each electric heating cable required.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
B.
Field quality-control test reports.
C.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric heating cables to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace electric heating cable that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING
230533 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SELF-REGULATING, HEATING CABLES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Chromolox Model
SRL Self Regulating Heating Cable or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Codes, Approvals and Standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Pyrotenax; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls.
Raychem; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls.
Thermon Manufacturing Co.
FM
IEEE515
NEC
NEMA
UL 746B
ANSI
Factory Mutual Research Corporation
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
U.S. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
American National Standards Association
Heating Element:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Self regulating heating cable shall vary its power output relative to the temperature of the
surface of the pipe. Cable shall be designed such that it can be crossed itself and cut to
length in field.
Cable shall be designed for a useful life of 20 years or more with “power on”
continuously.
Cables shall be capable of passing a 1.6 kV dielectric test for one minute after undergoing
a 10 ft-lb impact (IEEE 515-1997 test 4.1.8).
Heating cable shall consist of two 16 AWG, or larger nickel-plated copper bus wires
embedded in a self-regulating polymeric core that controls power output so that the cable
can be used directly on plastic or metallic pipes.
D.
Cable Cover: Thermal Plastic Rubber (TPR) outer jacket with UV inhibitor.
E.
Maximum Operating Temperature (Power On): 150 deg F.
F.
Maximum Exposure Temperature (Power Off): 185 deg F.
G.
Capacities and Characteristics:
1.
Heating Hot Water and Chilled Water Piping
a.
b.
230533 - 2
Maximum Heat Output: Nominal 5.0 Watts/Ft.
Piping Diameter: Varies NPS 2 INCH NPS.
HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING
Burns Engineering, Inc.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Volts: 277 V
Phase: Single
Hertz: 60.
CONTROLS
A.
Remote bulb unit with adjustable temperature range from 30 to 50 deg F.
B.
Snap action; open-on-rise, single-pole switch with minimum current rating adequate for
connected cable.
C.
Remote bulb on capillary, resistance temperature device, or thermistor for directly sensing pipewall temperature.
D.
Corrosion-resistant, NEMA 4X fiberglass waterproof enclosure.
E.
Alarm shall be provided and sent to building BAS in the event of an error involving the heat
trace..
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Cable Installation Accessories: High tensil strength aluminum foil tape, 2-mil thickness with
pressure-sensitive acrylic adhesive; fiberglass tape for cable attachment; end seals and splice
kits; and installation clips, all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
B.
Warning Labels:
Equipment."
C.
Warning Labels: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils thick, and
with pressure-sensitive, permanent, water resistant, self-adhesive back.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
1.
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches : 3/4 inch
minimum.
2.
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2
inches minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
2.
Ensure surfaces and pipes in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs and
sharp protrusions.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING
230533 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install electric heating cable for valves and piping exposed outdoors beneath cooling towers
according to manufacturer's written recommendations using slack cable to allow movement
without damage to cable.
B.
For pipe sizes NPS 4 and larger, install parallel heat trace cables, when specified, longitudinally
along the length of the pipe and equally spaced around the circumference of the pipe.
C.
Install high tensil strength aluminum foil tape between heat trace cable and PVC piping after
piping has been tested and before heat tracing is installed.
D.
Install electric heating cables on top of aluminum foil tape before pipe insulation is installed.
E.
Install electric heating cables according to IEEE 515.1.
F.
Install insulation over piping with electric cables according to Division 23 Section "HVAC
Insulation."
G.
Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating cables.
H.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
I.
Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Perform tests after cable installation but before application of insulation covering.
1.
2.
Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing.
Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current
simultaneously.
B.
Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal
insulation on pipe-mounting cables.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 230533
230533 - 4
HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
2.
B.
Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each
type and size of vibration isolation device type required.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
1.4
Elastomeric isolation pads.
Open-spring isolators.
Spring hangers.
Vibration isolation equipment bases.
Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including
anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable
motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
Vibration Isolation Base Details:
Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,
rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for HVAC
piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports
and restraints, if any.
B.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C.
Welding certificates.
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
230548 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.5
A.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS
Elastomeric Isolation Pads:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform
loading over pad area.
Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.
Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.
Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern.
Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.
Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.
a.
b.
2.2
A.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern.
Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Mounting Plates:
a.
b.
Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and
threaded with threaded studs or bolts.
Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to
support structure.
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
230548 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
2.3
A.
Elastomeric Material:
material.
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
A.
Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS
1.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator
pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw
to fasten and level equipment.
Rubber acoustical barrier to reduce transmission of high-frequency vibration.
SPRING HANGERS
Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in
Compression:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
230548 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
8.
9.
2.5
A.
Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Kinetics Noise Control.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
Steel Bases: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.
1.
Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
bases or rails.
a.
2.
3.
C.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
Concrete Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for
placement of cast-in-place concrete.
1.
Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch
clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
bases or rails.
a.
2.
3.
4.
Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.
Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.
Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation
mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.
Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors
in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported
equipment manufacturer.
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
230548 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations
before installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
VIBRATION CONTROL SCHEDULE
Fans and Motors in all AHUs:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Base Mounted Pumps (Slab on Grade):
1.
2.
3.
C.
Isolator Type: Spring Hangers
Minimum Static Deflection: 0.25 inches
Base Type: None
In-line Pumps:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Isolator Type: Spring Hangers
Minimum Static Deflection: 1.5 inches
Base Type: None
Fan Powered Terminal Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Isolator Type: Open Spring Isolators
Minimum Static Deflection: 0.75 inches
Base Type: Concrete Inertia Base
In-line Centrifugal Fans:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Isolator Type: Open Spring Isolators
Minimum Static Deflection: 1.5 inches
Base Type: Steel Frame Base Rail
Isolator Type: Spring Hangers
Minimum Static Deflection: 0.25 inches
Base Type: None
Roof Mounted Exhaust Fans (Roof Ventilators):
1.
2.
3.
Isolator Type: Base Curb
Minimum Static Deflection: 1.0 inches
Base Type: None
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
230548 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
G.
Piping Connections to Rotating Equipment:
1.
2.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Piping Connections: Spring Hangers (in all equipment rooms and up to 50 feet from
vibrating or rotating equipment)
Minimum Static Deflection: 0.75 inches (The first three hangers should provide the same
deflection as the equipment isolators.)
VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment
attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and
formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete". Installation of vibration
isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in
stresses or misalignment.
VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES INSTALLATION
Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment
attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and
formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete.
END OF SECTION 230548
VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC
230548 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Equipment labels.
Warning signs and labels.
Pipe labels.
Duct labels.
Stencils.
Valve tags.
Warning tags.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed
content for each label.
D.
Valve numbering scheme.
E.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
A.
Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, phenolic labels for mechanical
engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
Letter Color: White.
Background Color: Black.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch
bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number
and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
D.
Nomenclature used for identification shall be the same as that used on the drawings and the
Universities Preventative Maintenance Program.
2.2
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
B.
Letter Color: Black.
C.
Background Color: Yellow.
D.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
F.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches), and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
G.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets.
H.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I.
Label Content:
instructions.
J.
Install warning signs and labels on all hazards such as low ductwork, piping, etc… in
accordance with OSHA standards.
2.3
Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
PIPE AND DUCT LABELS
A.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
C.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1.
2.
2.4
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
VALVE TAGS
A.
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch numbers.
1.
2.
B.
Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped
holes for attachment hardware.
Fasteners: Brass [beaded chain.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or
space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1.
2.
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
Valve tag nomenclature shall be coordinated with the University’s existing tag system
and shall be approved by the Owner.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
WARNING TAGS
A.
Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card
stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches.
Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO
NOT OPERATE."
Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
Pipe Label Color Schedule (Refer to University Design Guide for additional details):
1.
2.
3.
4.
Chilled-Water Piping (CHWS/CHWR): Green
Secondary Chilled Water Piping (SCHWS/SCHWR): Green
Heating Water Supply Piping (HWS/HWR): Yellow
Steam Supply (HPS/MPS/LPS): Yellow
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
5.
6.
7.
3.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Steam Condensate (HPR/MPR/LPR): Yellow
Steam Vent: (SV): Yellow
Pump Condensate (PC): Yellow
DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color
codes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.5
Blue: For cold-air supply ducts.
Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.
Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.
ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.
Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of
50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
3.6
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering
hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use
fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where
required in accordance with OSHA standards.
END OF SECTION 230553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Balancing Air Systems:
a.
b.
2.
Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a.
b.
3.
1.3
Variable-air-volume systems.
Constant-air-volume systems.
Constant-flow hydronic systems.
Variable-flow hydronic systems.
Non-intrusive verification of hydronic system flow rates as follows:
a.
Chilled water primary and secondary piping upon completion of phases of work
for piping to Hawthorn Hall and Bozorth Hall.
b.
Heating hot water main to Bozorth Hall.
DEFINITIONS
A.
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B.
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D.
TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E.
TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation
that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
B.
Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
C.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
D.
Certified TAB reports.
E.
Sample report forms.
F.
Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Instrument type and make.
Serial number.
Application.
Dates of use.
Dates of calibration.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB.
1.
2.
B.
TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC, NEBB
or TABB.
TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC,
NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician.
TAB Conference: Meet with Commissioning Authority on approval of the TAB strategies and
procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of
the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled
meeting time and location.
1.
Agenda Items:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
The Contract Documents examination report.
The TAB plan.
Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1.
2.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
D.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Engineer.
E.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,
Section 5, "Instrumentation."
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
F.
ASHRAE Compliance:
Balancing."
G.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance:
Applicable
Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."
1.6
Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air
requirements
in
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
B.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
B.
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B.
Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C.
Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D.
Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E.
Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to
verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Section 233113 "Metal
Ducts” and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls
are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
F.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1.
2.
Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system.
Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G.
Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H.
Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I.
Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned
and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
K.
Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated
perforations.
L.
Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
M.
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N.
Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
O.
Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
P.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
7.
8.
3.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", ASHRAE 111, NEBB's "Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", “SMACNA's
"HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.
1.
B.
Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1.
2.
3.
After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with
requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Mechanical
Insulation."
C.
Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E.
Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
H.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I.
Check for airflow blockages.
J.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
L.
Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."
3.5
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A.
Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the
indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point
airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal
units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they
are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
B.
Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a
position that simulates full-cooling load.
Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for
the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal-unit discharge system losses.
Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to
make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream
from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the
same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a.
6.
Re-measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.
a.
7.
8.
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.
Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
Record final fan-performance data.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
C.
Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems
have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air
systems.
Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the
static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is
installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static
pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.
Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the
same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a.
8.
Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.
Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have
been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.6
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.
a.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal
units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are
distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set
at maximum airflow.
Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.
Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing
progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to
indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
Measure static pressure at the sensor.
Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the
same as described for constant-volume air systems.
PROCEDURES FOR MULTIZONE SYSTEMS
A.
Set unit at maximum airflow through the cooling coil.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
3.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Adjust each zone's balancing damper to achieve indicated airflow within the zone.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C.
Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.8
Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
Check liquid level in expansion tank.
Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.
Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement
pumps:
1.
Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow
and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
a.
2.
Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve
until indicated water flow is achieved.
a.
3.
If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval
from Engineer and comply with requirements in Section 232123 "Hydronic
Pumps."
Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in
overload conditions.
Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B.
Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as
designed.
C.
Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open
position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
D.
Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated pre-settings.
E.
Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1.
System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop
relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
F.
Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than indicated flow.
G.
Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
Record settings and mark balancing devices.
H.
Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
I.
Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.
J.
Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
3.9
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
3.10
Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic
systems.
PROCEDURES FOR STEAM SYSTEMS
A.
Measure and record upstream and downstream pressure of each piece of equipment.
B.
Measure and record upstream and downstream steam pressure of pressure-reducing valves.
C.
Check settings and operation of automatic temperature-control valves, self-contained control
valves, and pressure-reducing valves. Record final settings.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
D.
Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
E.
Verify the operation of each steam trap.
3.11
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS
A.
Measure water flow through all circuits.
B.
Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
C.
Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.
D.
Measure inlet steam pressure.
E.
Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.
3.12
A.
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.13
A.
Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number,
serial number, and nameplate data.
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.14
A.
Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
Motor horsepower rating.
Motor rpm.
Efficiency rating.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 5 percent.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus 5 percent.
Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent.
Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 5 percent.
REPORTING
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
3.15
A.
FINAL REPORT
General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1.
2.
B.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Pump curves.
Fan curves.
Manufacturers' test data.
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Title page.
Name and address of the TAB contractor.
Project name.
Project location.
Architect's name and address.
Engineer's name and address.
Contractor's name and address.
Report date.
Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
Summary of contents including the following:
a.
b.
c.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Indicated versus final performance.
Notable characteristics of systems.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
Conditions of filters.
Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 11
Burns Engineering, Inc.
e.
f.
g.
h.
D.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
Water and steam flow rates.
Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
Terminal units.
Balancing stations.
Position of balancing devices.
Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
Motor Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Unit identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and unit size.
Manufacturer's serial number.
Unit arrangement and class.
Discharge arrangement.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
Number, make, and size of belts.
Number, type, and size of filters.
Motor make, and frame type and size.
Horsepower and rpm.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Total air flow rate in cfm.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 12
Burns Engineering, Inc.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
F.
Outdoor airflow in cfm.
Return airflow in cfm.
Outdoor-air damper position.
Return-air damper position.
Vortex damper position.
Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
1.
Coil Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
System identification.
Location.
Coil type.
Number of rows.
Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
Make and model number.
Face area in sq. ft.
Tube size in NPS.
Tube and fin materials.
Circuiting arrangement.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
G.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Air flow rate in cfm.
Average face velocity in fpm.
Air pressure drop in inches wg.
Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
Water flow rate in gpm.
Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
Entering-water temperature in deg F.
Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.
Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.
Inlet steam pressure in psig.
Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1.
Fan Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
System identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and size.
Manufacturer's serial number.
Arrangement and class.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 13
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
Motor Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Total airflow rate in cfm.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
Suction static pressure in inches wg.
Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1.
Report Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
I.
Motor make, and frame type and size.
Horsepower and rpm.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.
Number, make, and size of belts.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
H.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
System and air-handling-unit number.
Location and zone.
Traverse air temperature in deg F.
Duct static pressure in inches wg.
Duct size in inches.
Duct area in sq. ft.
Indicated air flow rate in cfm.
Indicated velocity in fpm.
Actual air flow rate in cfm.
Actual average velocity in fpm.
Barometric pressure in psig.
Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
System and air-handling unit identification.
Location and zone.
Apparatus used for test.
Area served.
Make.
Number from system diagram.
Type and model number.
Size.
Effective area in sq. ft.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 14
Burns Engineering, Inc.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
J.
Air flow rate in cfm.
Air velocity in fpm.
Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.
Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
Final air flow rate in cfm.
Final velocity in fpm.
Space temperature in deg F.
System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
System and air-handling-unit identification.
Location and zone.
Room or riser served.
Coil make and size.
Flowmeter type.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
K.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Air flow rate in cfm.
Entering-water temperature in deg F.
Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.
Entering-air temperature in deg F.
Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and
include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
2.
Unit identification.
Location.
Service.
Make and size.
Model number and serial number.
Water flow rate in gpm.
Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.
Pump rpm.
Impeller diameter in inches.
Motor make and frame size.
Motor horsepower and rpm.
Voltage at each connection.
Amperage for each phase.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Seal type.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 15
Burns Engineering, Inc.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
L.
Report Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
A.
Instrument type and make.
Serial number.
Application.
Dates of use.
Dates of calibration.
INSPECTIONS
Initial Inspection:
1.
2.
After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance
readings documented in the final report.
Check the following for each system:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Static head in feet of head or psig.
Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.
Actual impeller size in inches.
Full-open flow rate in gpm
Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.
Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.
Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.
Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.
Final water flow rate in gpm.
Voltage at each connection.
Amperage for each phase.
Instrument Calibration Reports:
1.
3.16
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
Final Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that
testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request
that a final inspection be made by the Commissioning Authority. Refer to Section 230800
“Mechanical Commissioning Requirements” and Section – 019113 “Commissioning
Requirements General”.
The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the
presence of Commissioning Authority.
Commissioning Authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final
report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 16
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
5.
C.
2.
3.17
measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a
normal 8-hour business day.
If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,
proceed as follows:
1.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing
device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final
inspection.
If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB
contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the
cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions
are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 17
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 18
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
.SECTION 230713 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes mechanical insulation for equipment, and pipe, including the
following:
1.
Insulation Materials:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
1.2
1.3
Calcium silicate
Flexible elastomeric.
Mineral fiber.
Adhesives.
Mastics.
Lagging adhesives.
Sealants.
Factory-applied jackets.
Field-applied jackets.
Tapes.
Securements.
Corner angles.
Acoustical duct lining in any part of the duct system is prohibited. All ductwork requiring
insulation shall be externally insulated. Double walled ducts consisting of an outer wall
of galvanized sheet metal, an inner wall of perforated galvanized sheet metal with
insulation sandwiched between the layers is permitted, only where noted on the drawings.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ASJ: All-service jacket.
B.
FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper.
C.
FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene.
D.
PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride.
E.
SSL: Self-sealing lap.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity,
thickness, and jackets both factory and field applied, if any.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show details for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.4
Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
Attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.
Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each
type of insulation.
Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access
panels.
Application of field-applied jackets.
Application at linkages of control devices.
Field application for each equipment type.
C.
Installer Certificates:
requirements.
D.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of
insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements
indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
E.
Field quality-control inspection reports.
Signed by Contractor certifying that installers comply with
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an
apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of
Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
2.
1.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 150 or less.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with
appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.6
1.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application,
duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment
insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish
and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied
jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that
have satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the manufacturers specified.
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall
be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content
of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
F.
Calcium Silicate:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous
calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type I.
Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of
noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous
reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and
flanges.
Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
H.
Industrial Insulation Group (IIG); Thermo-12 Gold.
Approved Equal.
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ.
Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
I.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factoryapplied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "FactoryApplied Jackets" Article.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
J.
Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum
applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment
applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.3
CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
Johns Manville; Microlite.
Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service
temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.
Fuller Company; CP-97.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 290.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.
Fuller Company; 81-27.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-30.
Vimasco Corporation; 760.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
C.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II,
Class I.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
E.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C,
Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
F.
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.
Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding
Adhesive.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.
Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.
230713 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply
with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic:
ambient services.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry
film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-30.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-35.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-25.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 501.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic:
services.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient
Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 570.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-70.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
5.
E.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient
services.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film
thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.
Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
Color: White.
LAGGING ADHESIVES
A.
Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.
Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30.
Vimasco Corporation; 136.
Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere
fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
Vimasco Corporation; 750.
230713 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: Aluminum.
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.7
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: White.
FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A.
Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 5 strands
by 5 strands/sq. in. for covering equipment.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
B.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.
Fuller Company; Chil-Glas No. 5.
Approved Equal.
Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands
by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for equipment.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.8
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
Or approved equal.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.
Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.
Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
Approved Equal.
FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
A.
Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW,
Luben 59.
230713 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
b.
2.9
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.10
Approved Equal
ASJ:
White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive
covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C.
PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and
forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
Color: White.
Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field
fabricate.
a.
5.
D.
Johns Manville; Zeston.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,
flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical
joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
Metal Jacket:
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.
PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
230713 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
c.
2.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005,
Temper H-14.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick,
heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick,
heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
2.11
Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and longradius elbows.
Tee covers.
Flange and union covers.
End caps.
Beveled collars.
Valve covers.
Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting
covers are not available.
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.
230713 - 11
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 6.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic
adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555.
Compac Corp.; 130.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC
tape.
Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 6 mils.
Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 500 percent.
Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive and UL listed.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.12
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.
Compac Corp.; 120.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.
Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 3.7 mils.
Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 5 percent.
Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS
A.
Bands:
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
Childers Products; Bands.
PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
230713 - 12
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
c.
2.
3.
4.
B.
RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 316, 304 or
Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14,
0.020 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted
to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1.
Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed
for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth
of insulation indicated.
a.
Available Products:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin,
fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-diameter shank,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized
carbon-steel washer.
a.
Available Products:
1)
2)
3)
4)
3.
AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.
GEMCO; CD.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.
Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.
AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.
GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.
Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate
welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness
indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
Comply with the following requirements:
a.
Available Products:
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T.
GEMCO; Perforated Base.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by
2 inches square.
Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
230713 - 13
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
d.
2.13
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with
demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
CORNER ANGLES
A.
Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according
to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free
of defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
will adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply
a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1.
2.
Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick
and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140
and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials
and application methods for operating temperature range.
Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32
and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for
appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature
range.
C.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in
contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 14
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even
surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping
including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in
insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.
Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in
either wet or dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation
on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment
to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier
mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended
by insulation material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger,
support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and
wet and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 15
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive selfsealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches
o.c.
a.
4.
5.
Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its
nominal thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and
cracking due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
P.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Manholes.
Handholes.
Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below
top of roof flashing.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation
flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 16
Burns Engineering, Inc.
C.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through wall penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall
flashing at least 2 inches.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire
Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation
at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate
damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1.
F.
Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire
rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match
adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2
inches.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies according to Division 7.
DUCT INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums:
insulation pins.
1.
2.
3.
Secure with adhesive and
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from
insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
230713 - 17
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
b.
B.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16
inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints.
Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross
bracing.
Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pins.
1.
2.
3.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams
and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end
of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch
outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factoryor field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,
seams, and protrusions.
a.
b.
5.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from
insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16
inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints.
Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross
bracing.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
and plenums.
Do not over-compress insulation during installation.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with
tape matching insulation facing.
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain
vapor-barrier seal.
Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F
at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic
applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of
insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be
insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less
than 3 inches.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible
to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval
duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 18
Burns Engineering, Inc.
6.
3.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on
alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure
insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment,
including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight
joints. Stagger end joints.
Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers
on sides of tanks and vessels as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service
temperature and with substrate.
On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from
insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.
Do not over-compress insulation during installation.
Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of
tanks and vessels.
Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with
tape matching insulation facing.
Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select
band material compatible with insulation materials.
Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical
and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for
securing insulation. Stretch pre-stressed aircraft cable around the diameter of
vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one
circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end.
Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a
wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and
stretch pre-stressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest
circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body
of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network
for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.
Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,
handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and
inspection.
Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 19
Burns Engineering, Inc.
10.
B.
2.
3.
Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and
coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward
bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8inch-diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections
together using a latching mechanism.
Fabricate boxes from aluminum, at least 0.050 inch thick.
For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and
penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a
vapor barrier.
INSTALLATION OF CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Boiler Breechings:
1.
2.
3.
3.8
For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open
ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.
Insulation Installation on Pumps:
1.
3.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and
tighten bands without deforming insulation material.
Install two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3
inches. Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer
layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals.
On exposed applications without metal jacket, finish insulation surface with a
skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement. When cement is dry, apply
flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth. Overlap
edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth.
Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish.
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
2.
3.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other
specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise
indicated.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made
from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be
butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints,
seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth,
hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation
of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe
insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie
wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 20
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to
and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints,
seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and
irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket
flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the
insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below
ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe
insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat
with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a
breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabricreinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible
elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers,
valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC
covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word
"UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature
taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes,
vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and
around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic,
and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of
same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as
adjoining pipe insulation.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend
insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness
over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange
cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material
compatible with insulation and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges
except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 21
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
5.
3.9
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting
of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its
attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches
over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or
union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly
with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and
trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturers’ recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
D.
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet
insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturers’ recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties including meters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.10
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation
when available.
When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and
sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing
and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of
air to surface being insulated.
MINERAL-FIBER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 22
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.
4.
2.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered
sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.11
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket
insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams
at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
D.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and
tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and
protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure
laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not
staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended
by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and
flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
C.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe
insulation to valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation
without disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A.
Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation
with factory-applied jackets.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- thick coats of lagging adhesive.
Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 23
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
3.12
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap
and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with
weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with
stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.
FINISHES
A.
3.13
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint
strips at end joints.
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed
insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and
end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and
bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturers’ recommended adhesive.
1.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats
of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to perform field
inspections and prepare inspection reports.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied
jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the
"Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation.
Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of
equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large
equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by
removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their
installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight
pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two
locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations
of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service
defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 24
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.14
C.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work.
D.
Install new insulation and jackets to replace insulation and jackets removed for
inspection. Repeat inspection procedures after new materials are installed.
DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Indoor, supply and exhaust in conditioned space.
Indoor, return located in non-conditioned space.
Indoor, relief and outdoor air located in non-conditioned space.
Indoor, exhaust within 10 feet of roof.
Items Not Insulated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.15
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Fibrous-glass ducts.
Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code
and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
Flexible connectors.
Vibration-control devices.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
DUCT INSULATION AND JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Indoor Rectangular Supply and Return Ductwork in non-conditioned Mechanical Rooms
and Duct Shafts:
1.
2.
B.
Indoor Rectangular and Round Supply and Exhaust Ductwork in conditioned space.
1.
2.
C.
Rigid Mineral Fiber Board: 1.5 inches thick with a density of 3 lbs/cu. Ft.
FSK Jacket
Mineral Fiber Wrap: 1.5 inch thick with a density of 1lbs/cu. Ft.
FSK Jacket
Outside Air Intake, Relief and Exhaust Plenums:
1.
2.
Rigid Mineral Fiber Board: 2” thick with a density of 6 lbs/cu. Ft.
FSK Jacket
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 25
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.16
EQUIPMENT INSULATION AND JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is
listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.
C.
Steam-to-Hot-Water Heat Exchanger:
1.
2.
D.
E.
Pre-Formed Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank Insulation: 2 inches thick
Field Applied PVC Jacket
Steam Condensate Tank and Receiver:
1.
2.
Calcium Silicate: 3 inches thick
Cement Finish
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
3.18
Mineral-Fiber Board: 3 inches thick with a density of 3-lb/cu. ft.
Field Applied Aluminum Jacketing
Construct in removable sections for access to pump casing. Lube and drain
valves shall extend outside of insulated covers.
Air Separators and Expansions Tanks
1.
2.
F.
Calcium Silicate: 3 inches thick
Cement Finish
Chilled-Water Pump:
1.
2.
3.
3.17
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified
for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a
piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Heating Hot Water, 190 Deg F :
1.
NPS 2” and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
2.
NPS 2-1/2” and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
B.
Pre-formed Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation with ASJ: 1.5 inch thick.
Pre-formed Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation with ASJ: 2 inch thick.
High Pressure Steam and Steam Condensate Piping, > 350 Deg. F :
1.
NPS 3/4” and Smaller:
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 26
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
a.
2.
NPS 1” to NPS 3”:
a.
3.
C.
NPS 4”:
a.
Pre-formed Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation with ASJ: 4 inch thick.
NPS 1” and Smaller:
a.
2.
3.
Pre-formed Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation with ASJ: 3 inch thick.
Condensate Receiver and Receiver Vents:
1.
All Sizes:
a.
Pre-formed Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation with ASJ: 1.0 inch thick.
Chilled Water, above 40 Deg F :
1.
All Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
Pre-formed Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation with ASJ: 1.5 inch thick.
Condensate Drains for Air Conditioning Equipment, 60 Deg F (Avg. Pipe Temp):
1.
NPS 0.5-2”: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
3.19
Pre-formed Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation with ASJ: 2.5 inch thick.
NPS 2” and Larger:
a.
F.
Pre-formed Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation with ASJ: 1.5 inch thick.
NPS 1” to NPS 1.5”:
a.
E.
Pre-formed Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation with ASJ: 3 inch thick.
Low Pressure Steam and Steam Condensate Piping , 201-250 Deg F:
1.
D.
Pre-formed Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation with ASJ: 2.5 inch thick.
Flexible Cellular Glass: 0.5 inch thick.
INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Field Applied Jacket requirements in addition in addition to those noted in the
sections above. Piping and equipment below 8 feet in mechanical rooms shall
receive a metal jacket.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 27
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
B.
Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket,
install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
C.
Pipe, Fittings and inline equipment exposed in mechanical rooms:
1.
Metal Jacket on Pipe and PVC Jacket on Fittings.
END OF SECTION 230713
MECHANICAL INSULATION
230713 - 28
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 230800 – COMMISSIONING GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
The purpose of this section is to specify Division 23 responsibilities in the commissioning
process.
B.
The systems to be commissioned are listed in Section 019113.1.08.
C.
Commissioning requires the participation of Division 23 to ensure that all systems are
operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning
requirements and coordination are detailed in Section 019113. Division 23 shall be familiar
with all parts of Section 019113 and the commissioning plan issued by the CA and shall
execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents.
1.2
RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Mechanical, Controls and TAB Contractors: The commissioning responsibilities applicable to
each of the mechanical, controls and TAB contractors of Division 23 are as follows (all
references apply to commissioned equipment only):
B.
Construction and Acceptance Phases
1.
2.
3.
Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the
Cx process.
Contractors shall provide the CA with normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals of
commissioned equipment.
Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual submittals, to
the CA for development of start-up and functional testing procedures.
a)
b)
c)
4.
Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up,
operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any ownercontracted tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if any, and full
warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the
warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, the installation, start-up and
checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual
field checkout sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be
submitted to the Commissioning Agent.
The Commissioning Agent may request further documentation necessary for the
commissioning process.
This data request may be made prior to normal submittals.
Provide a copy of the O&M manuals and submittals of commissioned equipment,
through normal channels, to the CA for review and approval.
COMMISSIONING GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
230800 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
C.
Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the operation and
control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or
equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures.
Provide limited assistance to the CA in preparing the specific functional performance test
procedures.
During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the mechanical-related portions
of the pre-functional checklists for all commissioned equipment.
Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational checkout
procedures, providing a copy to the CA.
Address current A/E punch list items before functional testing. Air and water TAB shall
be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied before functional testing of the
respective air- or water-related systems.
Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the functional
performance tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon
schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and
problem-solving.
Provide skilled technicians to perform functional performance testing under the direction
of the CA for specified equipment in Section 019113. Assist the CA in interpreting the
monitoring data, as necessary.
Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as
interpreted by the CA, CM and A/E and retest the equipment.
Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and
updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.
During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and final CAD
as-builts for contractor-generated coordination drawings. Update after completion of
commissioning (excluding deferred testing).
Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as
specified.
Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain
the validity of the warranty.
Warranty Period
1.
2.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witnessed by the CA,
according to the specifications.
Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and as-built
drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing.
Mechanical Contractor: The responsibilities of the HVAC mechanical contractor, during
construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed in (A) are:
1.
2.
Provide startup for all HVAC equipment, except for the building automation control
system.
Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor and CA by:
a)
b)
c)
Putting all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continuing the
operation during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as required.
Including cost of sheaves and belts that may be required by TAB.
Providing test holes in ducts and plenums where directed by TAB to allow air
measurements and air balancing. Providing an approved plug.
COMMISSIONING GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
230800 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
d)
3.
4.
5.
E.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Providing temperature and pressure taps according to the Construction Documents
for TAB and commissioning testing.
Install a P/T plug at each water sensor which is an input point to the control system.
List and clearly identify on the as-built drawings the locations of all air-flow stations.
Notify the CM or CA depending on protocol, when pipe and duct system testing,
flushing, cleaning, startup of each piece of equipment and TAB will occur. Be
responsible to notify the CM or CA, ahead of time, when commissioning activities not
yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction. Be proactive in seeing that
commissioning processes are executed and that the CA has the scheduling information
needed to efficiently execute the commissioning process.
Controls Contractor. The commissioning responsibilities of the controls contractor, during
construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed in (A) are:
1.
Sequences of Operation Submittals: The Controls Contractor’s submittals of control
drawings shall include complete detailed sequences of operation for each piece of
equipment, regardless of the completeness and clarity of the sequences in the
specifications.
2.
Control Drawings Submittal
a)
b)
c)
d)
3.
4.
An updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of operation shall be
included in the final controls O&M manual submittal.
Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor in the following manner:
a)
b)
c)
5.
The control drawings shall have a key to all abbreviations.
The control drawings shall contain graphic schematic depictions of the systems and
each component.
The schematics will include the system and component layout of any equipment
that the control system monitors, enables or controls, even if the equipment is
primarily controlled by packaged or integral controls.
The Controls Contractor shall keep the CA informed of all changes to this list
during programming and setup.
Meet with the TAB contractor prior to beginning TAB and review the TAB plan to
determine the capabilities of the control system toward completing TAB. Provide
the TAB any needed unique instruments for setting terminal unit boxes and instruct
TAB in their use (handheld control system interface for use around the building
during TAB, etc.).
For a given area, have all required pre-functional checklists, calibrations, startup
and selected functional tests of the system completed and approved by the CA prior
to TAB.
Provide a qualified technician to operate the controls to assist the TAB contractor
in performing TAB, or provide sufficient training for TAB to operate the system
without assistance.
Assist and cooperate with the CA in the following manner:
COMMISSIONING GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
230800 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
a)
b)
6.
7.
F.
Using a skilled technician who is familiar with this building, execute the functional
testing of the controls system as specified. Provide two-way radios during the
testing.
Execute all control system trend logs as required by the CA.
Provide a signed and dated certification to the CA and CM upon completion of the
checkout of each controlled device, equipment and system prior to functional testing for
each piece of equipment or system, that all system programming is complete as to all
respects of the Contract Documents, except functional testing requirements.
List and clearly identify on the as-built duct and piping drawings the locations of all static
and differential pressure sensors (air, water and building pressure).
TAB Contractor. The duties of the TAB contractor, in addition to those listed in (A) are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Submit the outline of the TAB plan and approach for each system and component to the
CA, CM and the controls contractor six weeks prior to starting the TAB. This plan will
be developed after the TAB has some familiarity with the control system.
Communicate in writing to the controls contractor all setpoint and parameter changes
made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB which affect the control
system setup and operation.
Provide a draft TAB report within two weeks of completion. A copy will be provided to
the CA. The report will contain a full explanation of the methodology, assumptions and
the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon abbreviations and column
headings.
The report should follow the latest and most rigorous reporting
recommendations by AABC, NEBB or ASHRAE Standard 111.
Provide the CA with any requested data, gathered, but not shown on the draft reports.
Provide a final TAB report for the CA with details, as in the draft.
RELATED WORK
A.
Refer to Section 019113, Part 1.5 for a listing of all sections where commissioning
requirements are found.
B.
Refer to Section 019113 Part 1.4 for systems to be commissioned and section 019113 Part 1.6
for functional testing requirements.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
TEST EQUIPMENT
A.
Division 23 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this
Division.
B.
Refer to Section 019113 for additional Division 23 requirements.
COMMISSIONING GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
230800 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
3.2
Division 23 shall provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning as required in
Section 019113.
STARTUP
A.
The HVAC mechanical and controls contractors shall follow the start-up and initial checkout
procedures listed in the Responsibilities list in this section and in 019113. Division 23 has
start-up responsibility and is required to complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully
functional, meeting the design objectives of the Contract Documents. The commissioning
procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift that
responsibility partially to the commissioning agent or Owner.
B.
Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing may
proceed prior to the completion of systems or sub-systems at the discretion of the CA and CM.
Beginning system testing before full completion, does not relieve the Contractor from fully
completing the system, including all pre-functional checklists as soon as possible.
3.3
TAB
A.
3.4
Refer to the TAB responsibilities in Part 1.2 above.
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS
A.
3.5
Refer to Section 019113 Part 1.08 for a list of systems to be commissioned.
TESTING DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVALS
A.
Refer to Section 019113 for specific details on non-conformance issues relating to prefunctional checklists and tests.
B.
Refer to Section 019113 for issues relating to functional performance tests.
3.6
TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A.
The GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure
that training is completed.
B.
The CA shall be responsible for verifying the training of Owner personnel for commissioned
equipment. Refer to Section 019113 for additional details.
C.
Mechanical Contractor: The mechanical contractor shall have the following training
responsibilities:
1.
Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the
understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of HVAC
COMMISSIONING GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
230800 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
equipment including, but not limited to, pumps, boilers, furnaces, chillers, heat rejection
equipment, air conditioning units, air handling units, fans, terminal units, controls and
water treatment systems, etc.
During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the
requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired
or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.
The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on
each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece
of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer’s representative. Practical
building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of
the specific piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be required to
execute the training.
The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as requested,
to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment being
discussed.
The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation
and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals
for reference.
Training shall include:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
7.
8.
9.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material
included in the O&M manuals.
A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper
operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and
spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation
in all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency
procedures.
Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns.
Discussion of warranties and guarantees.
Common troubleshooting problems and solutions.
Explanatory information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all
plans and manuals in the facility.
Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
Classroom sessions shall include the use of overhead projections, slides,
video/audio-taped material as might be appropriate.
Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including
manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all
pieces of equipment.
The mechanical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and
overrides of any local packaged controls, not controlled by the central control system.
Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by
the Project Manager.
Controls Contractor. The controls contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:
1.
2.
Provide the CA with a training plan four weeks before the planned training according to
the outline described in Section 019113, Part 3.9.
The controls contractor shall provide designated Owner personnel training on the control
system in this facility. The intent is to clearly and completely instruct the Owner on all
the capabilities of the control system.
COMMISSIONING GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
230800 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Training manuals: The standard operating manual for the system and any special training
manuals will be provided for each trainee, with three extra copies left for the O&M
manuals. In addition, copies of the system technical manual will be demonstrated during
training and three copies submitted with the O&M manuals. Manuals shall include
detailed description of the subject matter for each session. The manuals will cover all
control sequences and have a definitions section that fully describes all relevant words
used in the manuals and in all software displays. Manuals will be approved by the CA.
Copies of audiovisuals shall be delivered to the Owner.
The trainings will be tailored to the needs and skill-level of the trainees.
The trainers will be knowledgeable on the system and its use in buildings. For the on-site
sessions, the most qualified trainer(s) will be used. The Owner shall approve the
instructor prior to scheduling the training.
During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the
requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired
or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.
The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as requested,
to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment being
discussed.
DEFERRED TESTING
A.
3.8
Refer to Section 019113, Part 3.10 for requirements of deferred testing.
WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS
A.
Written work products of Contractors will consist of the pre-functional checklists.
END OF SECTION 230800
COMMISSIONING GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
230800 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
COMMISSIONING GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
230800 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
The ATC contractor shall note that the building presently contains pneumatic-electric and
some direct digital ATC equipment. It is the intent to phase the project and completely
remove all existing pneumatically controlled ATC equipment, tubing, valves, and control
panels. The ATC contractor shall perform the demolition work for the pneumatic tubing .
Pneumatic tubing shall be neatly disconnected at the mains and capped so there is no
leakage and other parts of the system can remain in operation. The ATC contractor shall
provide all pneumatic devices including but not limited to main and branch air tubing,
piping and fittings to accommodate the phasing of construction and any type of
demolition of existing building materials and equipment that impact the existing system.
B.
This Section includes but is not limited to providing control equipment for the following
equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Central station air handling equipment indoor and outdoor
Packaged rooftop air handling units
VAV boxes, reheat coils, perimeter finned tube radiation and unit heaters.
Chilled Water primary-secondary interface
Variable flow secondary chilled water pumps
Steam to heating hot water heat exchangers
Constant flow heating hot water pumps
Variable flow heating hot water pumps
Chilled water and steam metering
Toilet and General Exhaust Fans
C.
The intent of this specification is for the design, supply, installation, commissioning of a
complete operating Facility Management Control System (FMCS), utilizing Direct
Digital Controls (DDC) as shown on the drawings and described herein. This shall
include the HVAC equipment described above including all control, alarm monitoring
and control, trending, reporting and maintenance management functions related to
building operations as indicated on the drawings and in the specifications.
D.
The FMCS contractor shall furnish and install all labor, materials, equipment, software or
any other services not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that are required to
meet the functional intent of this specification at no additional cost to the Owner.
E.
The intent of this specification is to expand the existing campus wide Honeywell
Enterprise Building Integrator (EBI) software package to accommodate control required
for and specified for this project. Provide all required hardware and software for BACnet
integration to the existing Honeywell EBI platform. The FMCS contractor shall provide a
complete BACnet control system up to and including connectivity to the Rowan
University campus building automation system network. Provide all software including
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
point database expansion, point mapping and graphic programming to integrate the new
system into the EBI platform. The FMCS contractor shall support and coordinate with
the University’s integrator to provide and commission a complete, functional system at
the EBI front end.
F.
The ATC contractor shall provide individual home runs for all Ethernet-TCP/IP
connections from the ATC panels in each mechanical room to the building network
switch(s) which are landed in the copier room where the existing network building
switches. Coordinate with Rowan University Network Systems and Services for landing
the Ethernet connections.
G.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for meters and measuring equipment
that relates to this Section.
Division 15 Section “Hydronic Piping” for chilled water choke valves that relates
to this Section.
Division 16 for conduit and wiring for 120v power.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
All new equipment as described on the drawings and in the specifications shall be controlled via a Direct Digital control system interfacing with the existing campus EBI system.
B.
In general, this project will require that the Mechanical Contractor or subcontractor shall
engage an authorized FMCS subcontractor to furnish, install, wire, guarantee and service
the entire electronic control system. The controls subcontractor shall also be required to
coordinate the selection, installation and wiring of all components required for integration
into the existing EBI system.
C.
This project shall provide control panels in the quantities and locations necessary to
properly access and house all control equipment. Panels shall be provided with integral
panel lighting, hinged covers and key operated locks. Top conduit access to panels is
prohibited. Panel should be located in a dry location and accessible from the floor level.
All control panel locations shall be pre-approved by a representative of Facilities Operations.
D.
Provide a fully integrated DDC System using electric/electronic actuation with energy
management, equipment monitoring, HVAC equipment integrations and consisting of the
following elements:
1.
2.
3.
Facility Management and Control System shall be comprised of a network
interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers communicating with the existing
campus EBI System.
Communication networks, inside the building, to allow data exchange between
standalone digital controllers and the building master Network Controller.
The Direct Digital Control System shall provide DDC capabilities and control of
the equipment described above.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
E.
All automatic dampers furnished by the FMCS Contractor shall be installed by the
HVAC Contractor, under the FMCS Contractor’s supervision. It shall be the
responsibility of the HVAC Contractor to provide control dampers that are correctly
installed so that they operate freely and close tightly.
F.
Automatic temperature control valves and separable wells for immersion elements, and
couplings for flow and pressure switches furnished by the FMCS contractor shall be
installed by the HVAC Contractor under the FMCS Contractor’s supervision.
G.
The FMCS contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, wiring and
instrument piping required for a complete and functioning system. DDC Control system
must fully communicate with the existing software communication system.
H.
All hardware materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly
manufactured for this and/or other systems and shall not be custom designed especially
for this project. All components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual
use.
I.
The FMCS Contractor shall be responsible for installation of all field equipment and
associated Ethernet communication transmission bus.
The FMCS Contractor shall supply necessary 120V power to each Standalone Digital
Controller (SDC) and provide transformers as required from electrical power panel
source.
J.
K.
The FMCS Contractor shall furnish and install necessary 120V power to all actuators,
meters, flow computers, VAV boxes etc. not loop powered from their primary SDC.
L.
It shall be understood that the drawings and specifications describe the approximate
locations of the work. Do not scale the drawings to determine exact positions and
clearances.
M.
Details of construction and of workmanship where not specifically described herein or
indicated on the drawings shall be subject to review by the Professional. It is the intent of
these specifications to provide a complete system, left in good working order, ready for
operation, including necessary labor and materials, whether or not specifically shown on
the drawings or mentioned herein.
N.
Before submitting proposals, examine the specifications and all drawings relating to the
work and become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work and the
relation of the work to that of other Sections. Examine the drawings of other Sections to
become familiar with all the problems and details of the building construction and to note
conditions which affect the work.
O.
Entire system is to be installed by the System Manufacturer or factory authorized
representative.
P.
Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems
equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.
Q.
Ensure system is completed and assist in project balancing and commissioning with
separate contracted balancing agent and front end systems integrator.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
R.
The installation shall comply with local, state, and federal code requirements as
applicable
S.
The FMCS contractor shall provide all required programming and hardware to allow
connection to the EBI system for all points as specified in this section or on the drawings.
The FMCS software programming shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Point Status.
Point Control.
Alarm.
Change of State.
Point Trending.
Time of Day Scheduling.
Timed Override.
System Panel Configuration.
System Panel Database Backup and Restore.
SDC Panel Configuration.
SDC Panel Database Backup and Restore.
DEFINITIONS
A.
DDC: Direct digital control.
B.
I/O: Input/output.
C.
LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing
interoperable control devices and networks.
D.
MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.
E.
PC: Personal computer.
F.
PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.
G.
RTD: Resistance temperature detector.
H.
FMCS: Facility Management Control System
I.
SDC: Standalone Digital Controller
J.
IDC: Interoperable Digital Controller
K.
ILC: Interoperable Logic Controller
L.
LIDC: Lighting Interface Digital Controller
M.
GDC: Gateway Digital Controller
N.
GP: Graphical Programmer
O.
HMI: Human Machine Interface
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
P.
PAC: Personnel Access Controller
Q.
GUI: Graphical User Interface
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
Comply with the following performance requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current
data within 10 seconds.
Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current
data within 8 seconds.
Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator
command of a binary object and device reaction.
Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control
units or workstation within six seconds.
Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds.
Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.
Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five
seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.
Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops,
and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second.
Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain
measured variables within tolerances as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
1.5
Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C).
Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.
Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.
Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C).
Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C).
Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F (1.0 deg C).
Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F (1.5 deg C).
Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F (0.15 deg C).
Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent.
Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale.
Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.
Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale.
Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg (2.5 Pa).
Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg (25 Pa).
Carbon Monoxide: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm.
Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
SUBMITTALS
A.
A full and complete set of drawings and specifications submittal package shall be sent to
the University for review by the Energy Controls and Instrumentation Department and
Engineer of Record and shall, at a minimum, include the following:
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
B.
General system description, system architecture, including sequence of
operations, point listing, description and type, engineering units, device range,
point alarm parameters, control panel locations, sensor locations, etc.
Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device.
Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics,
finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity,
manufacturer, and model number.
Include technical data for operator
workstation
equipment,
interface
equipment,
control
units,
transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control
panels, and operator interface equipment.
Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software,
operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.
Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of
sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model
number.
Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and
control devices.
Riser diagram showing all DDC controllers, operator workstations, network
repeaters and network wiring.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
Written description of sequence of operation.
Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.
Schedule of valves including flow characteristics.
DDC System Hardware:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers.
Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control
hardware.
Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring,
showing trunk data conductors and wiring between operator workstation
and control unit locations.
The Contractor shall furnish complete documentation pertaining to
hardware and all other equipment supplied. (including power
requirements per control panel). Contractor shall document all point
connections at the Data Gathering Panels Include all pertinent wiring,
field device, hardware, termination modules and software data.
Contractor shall document all I/O point cards (modules) and
communication cards installed in Data Gathering Panels. Include all
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
pertinent data, including firmware/software versions, switch settings, and
calibration data.
10.
Control System Software:
a.
All programs pertinent to project and backup format with software used
to create backup.
b.
Operating system software on acceptable digital media
c.
All software, hardware, and licenses required to operate, maintain,
and modify the system controls. Rowan University shall be specified
as the Owner.
d.
A list of system graphics, to include a design depiction or rendering of
each display.
e.
Table of Contents of routines that the contractor shall use to implement
the sequence of operations specified.
f.
A written narrative shall be detailed and include definitions of each
variable and instruction contained in the control panel’s code.
g.
A list of software points to be used to implement each and control PID
tuning parameters and any other software points used.
h.
A list of active control programs resident in each panel and their memory
footprint with respect to total available memory in the device. Control
programs and point database shall not consume more than 50% of
available device memory.
i.
Energy management routines implemented, if using manufacturer
firmware specific features, requires a full description and sequence of
operation for the feature to be included.
j.
Wireless system requirements (use of which must be pre-approved by the
University’s Energy Controls and Instrumentation Department on a caseby-case basis).
11.
Controlled Systems:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points
labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring.
Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements
including bases and special construction.
Written description of sequence of operation including schematic
diagram.
Points list.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
12.
Point name
BACnet point type and instance number (e.g. AI:9, BO:2, AV:7)
Functional description (e.g. Chilled Water Return Temperature)
Device termination address (if physical point)
Control Drawing callout reference (e.g. TT-1, ES-4, SD-2)
Alarm limits
Engineering Units
Device range in Engineering Units
Device range in physical units (e.g. 4-20mA, 0-10VDC)
Electrical Work:
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
a.
Submit data sheet on each type of wire to be used and its specific job
application (e.g. Signal Wiring, Communication, Data Communication
etc.).
D.
Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system
component complies with ASHRAE 135.
E.
Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system
component complies with BACnet.
F.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or
sensor cover with factory-applied color finishes.
G.
Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor
cover.
H.
Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Software operating and upgrade manuals.
Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with
data files.
Device address list.
Printout of software application and graphic screens.
Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control
systems.
I.
Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems
revisions or monitoring and control revisions.
J.
Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
K.
Field quality-control test reports.
L.
Operation and Maintenance Data: 3 sets of each manual describe below. Refer to
additional items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data,"
include the following:
1.
Hardware manual
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
General description and cut sheets for all components.
Detailed wiring and installation illustrations and complete calibration
procedures for each field panel device.
Complete trouble-shooting procedures and guidelines.
Complete operating instruction for all systems
Maintenance
instructions:
Document
all
maintenance
and
repair/replacement procedures.
DDC Software Manual
a.
b.
Sequence of Operations
Flow Chart Diagrams of Programming Objects
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Provide three copies of all manufacturer’s manuals covering the installed system.
This shall include but not be limited to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.6
Printed listing of controller and operator workstation database files.
Software point name, abbreviation list. Include name, description,
controller location, point type and point ID.
I/O Point List: Include point name, controller location, point number,
control device, range and span.
Printouts of all reports, group listings and alarm messages.
Index of all DDC point names with documentation manual page number
references
System Engineering Manual
System Installation Manual
Programming Manual
Engineering and Troubleshooting Bulletins
Operator Workstation Software Manual
All other pertinent manuals published by the control system
manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The BAS shall be provided by one of the following automation equipment/system
vendors: Allen Bradley, Honeywell ComfortPoint Open, Automated Logic Corp.
WebCTRL, Siemens Apogee. All commercial grade electronic controllers shall be
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2010 compliant and carry the BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL)
seal. All process control/PLC controllers shall be Object Linking and Embedding for
Process Control (OPC) compliant. All of the control companies identified below are to be
considered approved vendors for bid purposes unless otherwise directed by Rowan
University Energy Controls and Instrumentation Department:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Honeywell International, Marlton, NJ Branch Office
Automated Logic Corp/Radius Systems LLC, Chadds Ford, PA
Siemens Industry, Blue Bell, PA Branch Office
Thermo Systems, L.L.C.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized
representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components
required for this Project.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D.
Electronic motors used as control valve and control damper actuators must meet the
torque requirements for closing/opening against system pressure and the response time of
said actuators shall be adequate to maintain desired conditions of the process variable.
E.
Contractor shall provide control panels in the quantities and locations necessary to
properly access and house all control equipment. Panels shall be provided with hinged
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
covers and key operated locks. Top conduit access to any panels(s) is prohibited.
Panels shall be located in a dry location and accessible from floor level. All control panel
locations shall be indicated on the project coordination drawings. The control panel
power requirements shall be documented on the contract drawings. All control panels
shall be fed from a dedicated power source (UPS or emergency if available), have an
electrical breaker and available duplex outlet. All control panels shall have appropriate
primary and secondary circuit protections.
F.
Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components
G.
Codes and Approvals:
1.
2.
H.
All system components shall be fault tolerant.
1.
2.
1.7
1.8
The complete FMCS installation shall be in strict accordance to the national and
local electrical codes. All devices designed for or used in line voltage
applications shall be UL listed.
All microprocessor based remote DDC devices shall be listed for both UL-916;
Energy Management Systems and UL-864, Sub-categories UUKL, UOXX,
UDTZ; Fire Signaling and Smoke Control Systems.
Provide satisfactory operation without damage at 110% and 85% of rated voltage
and at + 3 hertz variation in line frequency.
Provide static, transient, and short circuit protection on all inputs and outputs.
Communication lines shall be protected against incorrect wiring, static transients
and induced magnetic interface. All bus connected devices shall be a.c. coupled,
or equivalent so that any single device failure will not disrupt or halt bus
communication.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are
indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to
equipment manufacturer.
B.
System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with
plans and room details before installation.
B.
Coordinate equipment with "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility with equipment that
interfaces with that system.
C.
Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator
workstation.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.9
D.
Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and
Control" to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces.
E.
Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility
with starter coils and annunciation devices.
F.
Coordinate equipment with Division 16 Section "Motor-Control Centers" to achieve
compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.
G.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
2.
1.10
Replacement Materials: One replacement diaphragm or relay mechanism for
each unique valve motor controller thermostat positioning relay.
Maintenance Materials: One thermostat adjusting key(s).
WARRANTY
A.
Provide the following warranties by the installing automatic temperature controls (ATC)
Manufacturer:
1.
2.
3.
1.11
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
1 year warranty on DDC control equipment.
2 year warranty on software upgrades.
2 year warranty on firmware upgrades.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Furnish service and maintenance by the installing FMCS Manufacturer of the building(s)
management and control system for one year.
B.
Provide two complete inspections, one in the heating season, and a second in the cooling
season, to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls as required, and submit written reports to
university HVAC personnel.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 11
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURES
A.
The intent of this specification is to provide an Open System solution that utilizes
industry standard communications protocols consisting of peer-to-peer networked, standalone, distributed controls in compliance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995/2004
BACnet® communication protocol in one open, interoperable system. Open System
communication protocols shall be utilized Top-to-Bottom from front-end Graphical User
Interface (GUI) to the field level distributed controllers. Proprietary communications,
objects, or communication “Tiers” are not acceptable allowing highest level of
interoperability between control devices and systems.
B.
The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for
representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to
industry standards including ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-1995/2004 BACnet® to
assure interoperability between all system components is required. For all native
BACnet® device, the device supplier must provide a PICS document showing the
installed device’s compliance level, or BIBB’s listing supported objects, properties, and
services. All native BACnet® Controllers should confirm to BIBB’s profile for B-BC,
B-ASC, B-AAC as applicable with the ability to support minimum data read and write
functionality listed in the associated control drawings and points list.. Physical
connection of BACnet® devices shall be via Ethernet utilizing BACnet® over IP without
the need for additional hardware viz. routers and / or gateways.
C.
All network controllers supplied under this contract shall be true “peer-to-peer”
communicating devices. Plant controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall
not be acceptable.
D.
A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to
manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal
Intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be
acceptable.
NETWORK CONTROLLER (NC)
A.
The Network Controller (NC) shall be a Native BACnet® controller based on 32 bit
technology to provide the interface between the LAN or WAN and the field control
devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices
connected to the NC. The NC shall conform to BACnet® Building Controller (B-BC)
profile and be provided with appropriate PIC statement defining BACnet® services and
objects supported. BACnet® Data Sharing BIBBs supported shall include at a minimum:
RP, RPM, WP, WPM, COV. Alarm and Event, Trending, and scheduling including
SCHED-A BIBBs support shall also be supported in BACnet® native communications.
The NC shall physically connect to the LAN without the need for additional Router
hardware. The NC shall support transmitting and receiving segmented messages as well
as BACnet® Broadcast Messages over IP. It should be possible to define any NC in an IP
subnet as a BBMD device. The NC shall also support both Secure (https://) and nonsecure (http://) remote web server access using commonly used web browsers. It shall be
capable of executing application control programs to provide:
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 12
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
One Ethernet Port -10 / 100 Mbps RJ45
One RS-232 port
One RS 485 port
Three independent BACnet® MS/TP Channel capable of supporting up to 90
Unitary controllers
A minimum of 24 On-board I/O, expandable up to 128 hardware points
Battery Backup using Gold Capacitor to avoid low battery alarms and subsequent
replacement during service life of the controller.
Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is
not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity)
A Reset Button
The NC must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 0 to 50°C
The NC must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 5 and
70°C
The NC must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 93% RH,
non-condensing
Integration
1.
D.
Calendar functions
Scheduling
Trending and Trending Backfill
Alarm monitoring and routing
Time synchronization
Integration of BACnet® devices and BACnet® controller data
Integration of MODBUS devices and MODBUS controller data
The Network Controller must provide the following hardware features as a minimum:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Any or all the 3 independent MS/TP channels may be used to integrate
MODBUS devices like Energy Meters etc. or BACnet® devices and BACnet®
controller data. The FMS contractor shall include if any, license required for this
interface within their scope.
Event Alarm Notification and actions
1.
The NC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and
analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.
2.
Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement
requirements including but limited to:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
To alarm
Return to normal
To fault
Provide for the creation of an unlimited number of alarm classes for the purpose
of routing types and or classes of alarms based on priority
Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or priority.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 13
Burns Engineering, Inc.
5.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for
equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count
values with appropriate password control.
E.
Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated.
F.
A log of alarms shall be maintained by the NC
G.
Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters.
H.
A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be
provided and available for review by the user.
I.
An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and
available for review by the user.
Native BACnet® Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)
A.
Controller shall be 32 bit microprocessor based BACnet® Application Specific
Controller in accordance with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004. Application
Specific Controller shall be provided for Air Handling Units, Variable Air Volume
(VAV) Terminals and other applications as shown on the drawings. The application
control program shall be resident within the same enclosure as the input/output circuitry,
which translates the sensor signals. The FMS Contractor must provide a PICS document
showing the installed systems compliance level to the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 1352004.
B.
All Application Specific Controller shall be fully programmable as per application with
the help of Windows based software programming tool. Controllers offering application
selection only (non-programmable), require a 15% spare point capacity to be provided for
all applications. All control sequences within or programmed into the B-ASC shall be
stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to
be retained.
C.
Stand-alone, Native BACnet®, UL Listed Application Controllers shall be used to
provide direct digital control of HVAC equipment. In addition to their standalone
capabilities, they shall also provide the ability networked in a peer-to-peer, BACnet®
MS/TP field network to other controllers, or as part of a complete facilities management
system which integrates multiple field networks. These controllers may be used to
optimize the energy consumption by implementing various control strategies such as
temperature setup/setback etc.
D.
Standard features for all Application Specific Controllers shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
32 bit microprocessor based controllers
Stand-alone or networked peer-to-peer capabilities as MS/TP, Masters to slave
devices are not acceptable
Should have on-board Real Time Clock
Should support BACnet® intrinsic alarm reporting
Should support BACnet® B-ASC profile and BTL
BACnet® MS/TP LAN with configurable baud rate from 9600 to 76.8k baud
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 14
Burns Engineering, Inc.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
All Inputs to be Universal Inputs with 12 bit resolution- software selectable as
analog or digital with standard and custom ranges.
Pulse counting shall be available for any one of binary inputs up to 15Hz
frequency
All Outputs to be Universal Outputs with 8 bit resolution - software selectable for
analog or digital with standard and custom ranges
Maximum 90 objects
Standard P, PI, or PID BACnet® Loop Objects.
Minimum of 1 Loop Object for each output.
In the particular case of Programmable VAV Controllers (VAV), the following
shall apply in addition to the standard features listed above:
a.
Standard VAV control sequences are incorporated to provide pressure
independent control of a single duct VAV unit
b.
Each VAV Controller shall be without actuator to provide flexibility to
choose suitable modulating or floating actuator based on the application.
For example VAV box controller used in the laboratory should use the
modulating actuator and the VAV box controller used in office area
should use the floating actuator.
c.
Each controller shall have an onboard flow-thru sensor for use with a
single or multi-point differential pressure measuring station or pitot tube.
Programmable controller to allow customizing of the standard sequences
for temperature setback, overrides, proportional wet reheat and other user
defined sequences to adapt to changing building conditions. The ability
to only change operating parameters or substitute between configurable
applications shall not be considered acceptable
d.
Should be easily programmable using Microsoft Windows based programming utility.
e.
The VAV controller shall communicate with the main network controller
at a baud rate of not less than 38.4K baud. The VAV controller shall provide LED indication of communication and controller performance to the
technician, without cover removal.
In the particular case of Programmable Small Point Controllers (SPC), the
following shall apply in addition to the standard features listed above:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Standard FCU control sequences are incorporated to provide control of
Fan Coil Unit
Programmable control basic to allow customizing of the standard sequences for temperature setback, overrides, proportional wet reheat and
other user defined sequences to adapt to changing building conditions.
The ability to only change operating parameters or substitute between
configurable applications shall not be considered acceptable
Should be easily programmable using Microsoft Windows based programming utility.
The SPC shall communicate with the main network controller at a baud
rate of not less than 38.4K baud. The SPC shall provide LED indication
of communication and controller performance to the technician, without
cover removal.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 15
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Native BACnet® Advanced Application Specific Controller (B-AAC)
A.
Controller shall be 32 bit microprocessor based BACnet® Advanced Application
Controller in accordance with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004 The application
control program shall be resident within the same enclosure as the input/output circuitry,
which translates the sensor signals. The system supplier must provide a PICS document
showing the installed systems compliance level to the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 1352004.
B.
All Advanced Application Controller shall be fully programmable with the help of
Windows based software programming tool and shall at all times maintain their
BACnet® compliance.
Controllers offering application selection only (nonprogrammable), require a 15% spare point capacity to be provided for all applications.
All control sequences within or programmed into the B-AAC shall be stored in nonvolatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained.
C.
Stand-alone, Native BACnet®, UL Listed Application Controllers shall be used to
provide direct digital control of HVAC equipment. In addition to their standalone
capabilities, they shall also provide the ability networked in a peer-to-peer, BACnet®
MS/TP field network to other MS/TP controllers, and VAV/SPC zone controllers on the
single MS/TP channel. These controllers may be used to optimize the energy
consumption by implementing various control strategies such as temperature
setup/setback etc.
D.
Standard features for all Advanced Application Controllers shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
32 bit microprocessor based controllers
Stand-alone or networked peer-to-peer capabilities on single MS/TP channel,
Masters to slave devices are not acceptable
Should have on-board Real Time Clock
Should support BACnet® intrinsic alarm reporting
Should support calendar objects for scheduling
Should comply to BACnet® B-AAC device profile
Flexibility to be used and connected to Network Controller to expand the I/O
capacity of network controller
BACnet® MS/TP LAN with configurable baud rate from 9600 to 76.8k baud
All Inputs to be Universal Inputs with 12 bit resolution- software selectable as
analog or digital with standard and custom ranges.
Pulse counting shall be available for any one of binary inputs up to 15Hz
frequency
a.
b.
2.5
Standard P, PI, or PID BACnet® Loop Objects
Minimum of one Loop Object for each output
PACKAGING AND ENVIRONMENT
A.
Distributed unitary controller enclosures (panels) shall be locking type, metal cabinet,
with common keying. The panels shall have a metal print pocket suitable for storing
wiring, service and log information. Indoor panels shall be NEMA 1 enclosures with
gaskets. Any panels in cooling tower or chemically treated areas shall be stainless steel
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 16
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
(Fiberglass enclosures rated for outside applications are acceptable).
controllers shall have a safety cover but no enclosure is required.
2.6
B.
The panel, when required, must functionally operate over a temperature range of 0 to 50 ,
and a humidity range of 0 - 93% non-condensing.
C.
DDC panels shall come with a minimum of six pre-existing available knockouts for ease
of wiring during installation.
D.
The electrical requirements shall be identified and coordinated by the Controls
Contractor. Any 230 VAC requirements are to be coordinated with controls/Electrical
Contractor. The controls/Electrical Contractor shall provide 230 VAC power circuits to
each panel. 230 VAC power should not be installed in the same panel as 24 VAC.
However, if 230 VAC power must be installed in the same panel with 24 VAC power due
to design and/or system constraints, the 230 VAC side of the panel shall be physically
isolated from the 24VAC side and clearly labeled. Use panduits in each control panel to
conceal all wiring. Fuse all transformers.
E.
Control panels shall be clearly identified by labels (2” lettering).
F.
Provide and install as-built wiring diagrams to indicate the control points on all
equipment. Also provide laminated point lists in all control panels.
TIME CLOCKS
A.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
VAV box
ATC-Diversified Electronics.
Paragon Electric Co., Inc.
SSAC Inc.; ABB USA.
TCS/Basys Controls.
B.
Seven-day, programmable-switch timer with synchronous-timing motor and seven-day
dial; continuously charged, nickel-cadmium-battery-driven, eight-hour, power-failure
carryover; multiple-switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per
day with two normally open and two normally closed output contacts.
C.
Self correcting for daylight savings time.
D.
Solid-state, programmable time control capable of providing three stages of on/off
control, lithium battery backup; keyboard interface and manual override; individual onoff-auto switches for each program; 365-day calendar with 20 programmable holidays;
fail-safe operation; system fault alarm; and communication package allowing networking
and time controls and programming from PC.
ELECTRONIC SENSORS AND DEVICES
A.
General Requirement: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct
mounting as required.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 17
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
B.
Refer to Bill of Materials on mechanical drawings for temperature and pressure elements
and indicating transmitters associated with chilled water and steam energy metering and
primary-secondary chilled water interface and system control.
C.
Temperature Transmitters (TT)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
All temperature transmitters shall be resistance temperature detectors (RTD 4-20
MA) with 2-wire circuitry. However, wall mounted thermostats can be thermistor
type or RTD. Wall mounted thermostats can be thermistor type or RTD. Wall
mounted thermostats shall be sealed and insulated to prevent false readings.
RTDs shall be platinum type (100 ohm at 32F) or nickel-iron type (1,000 ohm at
70F) as manufactured by Minco, and calibrated for the operating fange of the
measure variable.
Duct mounted insertion type RTDs (“RTD Duct Probe”) shall be rigid area
averaging type, and shall include the sensing probe, holder, utility box and gasket
to prevent air leakage and vibration noise. Minimum insertion depth shall be 80%
of duct.
Bendable area averaging type RTDs (“RTD Duct Avg.”) shall include the
averaging sensor, utility box and gasket to prevent air leakage and vibration
noise, and shall be used, as a minimum, in all mixed air and preheat temperature
applications. The mounting of the averaging RTDs shall be sufficient to cover the
free area top to bottom. Each pass shall not exceed 12 inches from the previous
pass. Minco model # S102339PE shall be used in applications less than 36
inches.
Fluid immersion type RTDs (“RTD Pipe Well”) shall be used for all hot, glycol,
chilled, condenser water sensing points or any other fluid and shall include RTD
probe, thermo wells, and temperature transmitters if required. Connection head
probe and connection head shall be removable without breaking fluid seal or
removing any equipment or piping. Fluid immersion RTDs shall be installed on
the top of the pipe in horizontal runs and at a positive slope on vertical runs to
prevent condensation from flowing to the connection head. Small bore pipe
should have thermo-wells installed at the elbows. All thermo-wells shall be
bottom third filled with heat conductive grease as manufacturer by Dow
Chemical. Thermo-wells shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall penetrate
pipe to a minimum of 2/3 the pipe diameter.
End to end (i.e. measure temperature at field devices versus displayed valued in
engineering units at DPU operator terminals and as displayed at CCU operator
terminals) minimum accuracy of all TT’s shall be +1.0 deg. F over 100 deg. F
span, +0.5 deg. F over any selected 20 deg. F span and +0.25 deg. F over any
selected 10 deg. F span.
Temperature transmitters sensing elements shall be provided in stainless steel
case, epoxy sealed for moisture resistance (Minco model TT211, no exceptions.)
All ATC devices should be installed to be accessible from the outside of
equipment, (AHU etc…) served. Accessibility of all devices should be verified
during the shop drawing review.
Provide NEMA 4 enclosures for devices mounted outdoors.
Mount RTDs per manufacturer’s requirements with insulated mounting brackets.
Mounting RTDs with cable ties is strictly prohibited.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 18
Burns Engineering, Inc.
10.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Temperature transmitters shall have the following ranges:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
3.
4.
Units shall be suitable for duct or wall (room) mounting.
Units shall be 2-wire transmitter with humidity sensor and shall operate on power
requirements of 24V DC nominally unregulated.
Unit shall produce linear continuous output of 4 to 20 MA for percent relative
humidity (%RH).
Sensors shall have the following performance and application criteria:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Input Range: 0 to 100%RH
Output Range: 4-20 MA
Accuracy (%RH): +2% between 0-95%RH at 25 Deg. C
Sensor Operating Range: -58 Deg. F to 185 Deg. F; (Maximum operating
temperature for wall mounted unit: 150 Deg. F)
Minimum zero span adjustments of +15% of full scale.
Vaisala model or equal. All equals are to be pre-approved by University
of Pennsylvania controls engineer.
Differential Pressure Switches:
1.
2.
2.8
20 to 120 deg. F
30 to 80 deg. F
50 to 250 deg. F
100 to 500 deg. F
Humidity Transmitters (HT)
1.
2.
E.
AHU (air only)
Chilled Water
Hot Water Systems
Steam Systems
Differential pressure switches (for 2 psi) and below shall be diaphragm operated
with minimum 3-1/2” diaphragm to actuate single pole double throw (SPDT) or
double pole double throw (DPDT) as shown and required. DPS shall be UL listed
with minimum 3% repetitive accuracy. DPS shall have set screw adjustment with
stainless steel calibration spring. DPS shall be Dwyer Series 1910 (SPDT Type)
or 1627 (DPDT Type) or approved equal.
DPT for use on high pressure applications (above 2psig) and water systems shall
be UL listed and shall be as manufactured by Barksdale or Asco with appropriate
range for the application. Provide DPT with snubbers and isolation valves on
both input lines (high and low) and with equalizing valve. DPS used on steam
application shall be provided with pigtail siphon.
STATUS SENSORS
A.
Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with
adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg (0 to 1240 Pa).
B.
Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with
adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig (55 to 414 kPa), piped across pump.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 19
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
C.
Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or
split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175
percent of rated motor current.
D.
Service Entrance Power Monitoring/Status:
1.
2.
Monitor and display phase-phase voltage, system frequency, phase ampacity, and
power consumption (KVA).
Monitor status of incoming service feeders for phase loss. Alarm upon loss of
any single, or multiple, loss of phase voltage.
E.
Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel
and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.
F.
Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty
rating, stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential
adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
2.9
2.10
BEC Controls Corporation.
I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
SMOKE DETECTORS
A.
Shall be located in air handling units and in the ductwork where shown on the HVAC
Drawings and/or required shall be supplied and installed by the Electrical Contractor. All
wiring to motor starters shall be by this contractor. All wiring to the fire alarm control
system (FACS) shall be by the University’s Fire Alarm subcontractor provided under
separate contract. Coordinate with University’s fire alarm subcontractor for
integration of smoke detectors and alarms into the FACS.
B.
Smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed to shutdown fans, close dampers and
isolate air handling units as required and described by NFPA 90A.
ELECTRICAL INTERFACE DEVICES:
A.
Current Switches: Self powered, solid state with adjustable trip current, selected to match
current and system output requirements.
B.
Control Relays:
1.
2.
3.
All control relays shall be UL listed with contacts rated for the application and
mounted in minimum NEMA 1 enclosure.
Relays used for across the line control (start/stop) of 120V motors, 1/4HP and
1/3HP shall be rated to break a minimum 10 amp inductive load.
Control relays for use on electrical systems greater than 120 volts shall be rated
for 600 volts and shall be Allen Bradley Bulleting 70, type N or approved
equivalent by the EC&I Department.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 20
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
C.
No relays shall be mounted inside the Motor Control Center.
Control Transformers:
1.
2.
3.
2.11
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Furnish and install control transformers as required.
Transformer loading shall not exceed 60% of capacity. All control transformers
shall include primary and secondary circuit protection.
Maintain enclosed environmental temperature within transformer operating range
as recommended by transformer manufacturer.
ACTUATORS
A.
Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke
cycles at rated torque.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
2.
Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump
differential pressure.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Valve actuators shall be electronic, spring return, and properly selected
for the valve body and service.
Actuators shall be fully proportioning and be spring return for normally
open or normally closed operation as called out in the sequence of
operations.
Actuator response shall be linear in response to sensed load.
Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
5.
6.
Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. (86.8 kgcm/sq. m) of damper.
Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. (62 kgcm/sq. m) of damper.
Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft (49.6 kgcm/sq. m) of damper.
Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. (37.2 kgcm/sq. m) of damper.
Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg (500 to 750 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face
Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm (5 to 13 m/s): Increase running torque by
1.5.
Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg (750 to 1000 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face
Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm (13 to 15 m/s): Increase running torque
by 2.0.
Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external,
manual gear release on non-spring-return actuators.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 21
Burns Engineering, Inc.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.12
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.
Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V
dc.
Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position
feedback signal.
Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F (Minus 30 to plus 50 deg C).
Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 30
to plus 121 deg C).
Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.
CONTROL VALVES
A.
All control valves (chilled water, hot water and steam) shall be of the throttling plug
(water service), V-port (chilled water choke valve service) repacking type, or globe
valves (steam service). Valves 2” and smaller shall have threaded brass bodies and unions
installed before and after for service. Valves larger than 2” shall be flanged and have cast
iron bodies. All valves shall be provided with stainless steel stems and trims, seats, plugs,
etc. Plug types shall be:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Steam – Linear characteristics – 1/3-2/3 for capacities 1,200 lbs/hr or greater.
(Consider the use of V-port ball valves for steam service with no 1/3-2/3
arrangement (300:1 rangeability).
Modulating chilled water service for hydronic coils – equal percentage plug.
Modulating hot water service for hydronic coils – equal percentage plug
Mixed water application service (non-coils) – linear characteristic.
Two position – flat seat/quick opening.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Honeywell
2.
Belimo
3.
Siemens
C.
Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on
maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Valve bodies shall be 2-way normally open or closed, or 3-way mixing as
specified. Valve bodies 2” and smaller shall have threaded brass bodies. Valve
bodies 2-1/2” and larger shall be cast iron, flanged and rated at 125 psig except
where otherwise noted.
Valves shall have stainless steel stems and allow for servicing including packing,
stem, and disk replacement.
Valves used for modulating control shall be sized for a minimum 5 psig
differential pressure at full flow.
Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:
1.
NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Class 250 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem,
renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with back-seating capacity repackable under pressure.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 22
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem,
plug-type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.
Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats.
a.
b.
4.
Sizing: 3-psig (21-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the
following:
a.
b.
c.
5.
6.
2.13
Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces
for plug on top and bottom.
Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and
guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom.
Two Position: Line size.
Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the
load pressure drop, whichever is more.
Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than
value specified above.
Flow Characteristics:
Two-way valves shall have equal percentage
characteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics.
Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall
provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump)
head for two-way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or
100 percent of total system (pump) head.
DAMPERS
A.
All dampers installed in outside air, return air and relief air duct connections in lieu of
factory installed dampers shall be premium ultra-low leak and thermally insulated. Refer
to drawings for field installed damper locations at units. Dampers shall be Tampco series
9000 thermally insulated, airfoil design or equivalent for minimal air leakage (Leakage
Class 1A at 1 in w.g.). and pressure drop. All leakage testing and pressure ratings shall be
based on AMCA Publication 500. Manufacturer shall submit brand and model of damper(s) being furnished.
B.
Two position dampers shall be parallel blade action. Modulating dampers shall be opposed blade action
C.
All other control dampers shall be by the following manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Air Balance Inc.
Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div.
TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.).
United Enertech Corp.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch- (2.8-mm-) minimum thick,
galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 23
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- (1.6-mm-)
thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches (200 mm) and length of 48
inches (1220 mm).
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.14
Secure blades to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated
hardware, with oil-impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade-linkage
hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel
blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to
plus 93 deg C).
Edge Seals: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and
spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, leakage class 1A at 1 in. w.g. All leakage
testing and pressure ratings shall be based on AMCA publication 500.
Two position dampers shall be parallel blade action. Modulating dampers shall
be opposed blade action.
ELECTRICAL, SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS
A.
All field devices except Room Temperature and Humidity Transmitters shall have
conduit connections made to them from junction boxes, with a minimum of 18 inches of
flexible metallic conduit ("Greenfield") (liquid tight for devices outdoors or otherwise
exposed to moisture) with sufficient slack to allow for removal and/or servicing.
B.
Communication Wiring:
1.
Communication wiring shall be run in conduit and shall be minimum three
individually 100% shielded pairs (i.e. six conductors), minimum 18 gauge cable
with overall PVC cover Belden #9773 or approved equivalent product of other
manufacturers, run in conduit with no splices, separate from all wiring over 30
volts. Shield shall be terminated as recommended by DPU manufacturer.
Contractor shall notify Owner/Engineer in writing within 60 days after aware of
contract if this is in conflict with shield termination recommended by the CCU
manufacturer. The contractor may use fiber Optic cable or other type of wiring
after review and approval by EC&I Department.
2.
In addition to the requirements specified above, all communication wiring cables
shall include a 100% redundancy shielded pair (two conductors) as unused spare
conductors. Where the number of conductors and specific cable specified above
for each type of Communication wiring will not meet this requirement for spare
conductors, Contractor shall provide approved equivalent product of Belden or
other manufacturer with the necessary number of Conductors and which meets
the requirements specified above.
3.
All repeaters and/or routers shall be installed in locked enclosures or located in a
space secured from unauthorized physical access.
4.
All LAN cabling shall be as specified by Rowan University Network Systems
and Services department. A second LAN port shall be located at each control
panel having an Ethernet drop to facilitate post installation service.
5.
Communication drops and controller locations shall be marked on the system
architecture or riser diagram such that the installed wire path from controller to
controller can be determined.
C.
Signal Wiring:
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 24
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
All signal wiring shall be point to point. No splices between the control panel
enclosure and field device are ever permitted. Terminal strips or terminal blocks
are permitted within the confines of a control panel enclosure if the use thereof
facilitates fabrication or post installation service. In such circumstances each wire
leading into and out of the termination strip or block shall be imprinted with the
signal name using polyolefin heat shrink labeling sleeves spaced not less than ½
inch from the cut end of the wire insulation.
Signal wiring to all analog field devices, including but not limited to temperature
transmitters (TT) (other than resistance temperature detectors (RTD)), humidity
transmitters (HT), current to pneumatic (I/P) transducers, shall be run in conduit
and shall be twisted, 100% shielded pair, minimum 18 gauge wire with PVC
cover Belden #8760 or approved equivalent product of other manufacturers, run
in conduit with no splices, separate from any wiring above 30 volts.
Signal wiring to RTDs shall be as listed above, except shall be three (3)
conductors Belden #8770.
Signal wiring to digital field devices (for circuits of 30 VAC or less) shall be as
specified herein below for Low Voltage Control Wiring.
a.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
2.15
Low Voltage Control Wiring (30 VAC or Less): Low voltage control
wiring shall be minimum 16 gauge, twisted pair, 100% shielded with
PVC over Belden #9316 or approved equivalent product of other
manufacturers run in conduit with no splices, separate from any wiring
above 30 volts.
Signal wiring shield shall be grounded at DPU end only or as recommended by
the DPU manufacturer.
If the field device has an enclosure, said enclosure shall be marked within an
imprinted label indicating the device control drawing callout (e.g. TT-3, ES-7,
SD-1). The control panel termination of the signal wiring shall be imprinted with
the signal name using polyolefin heat shrink labeling sleeves spaced not less than
½ inch from the cut end of the wire insulation.
Room temperature transmitters connected to terminal device controllers (VAV,
fain coil, unit ventilator) shall have their enclosure marked with an imprinted
label indicating the control drawing callout of the associated terminal device (e.g.
VAV2-1, FCU-4, UV-3).
Occupied space CO2 sensors shall have their enclosure marked with an imprinted
label indicating the control drawing callout of the associated unit (e.g. AHU-2,
RTU-6).
All exterior wiring shall be installed in galvanized steel conduit.
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A.
All auxiliary devices such as pressure switches, control switches, time delay relays and
control modules of all descriptions required to provide the specified control objectives
and fail safe features shall be furnished installed whether or not they are specifically
mentioned.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 25
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.16
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
PNEUMATIC PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Copper tubing shall be the control industry standard, ASTM B88 Type K either hard
copper or soft copper per the application.
B.
Polyethylene tubing shall be flame retardant “FR” rated for the pressure application.
Multi-tube bundles shall have an overall jacket of “FR” polyethylene.
C.
Pressure Gages: Manufacturer's standard to FS-GG-G-76, black letters on white background, 2 inch diameter, flush or surface mounted, with front calibration screw, suitable
dial range calibrated to match sensor, in appropriate units.
D.
Instrument Pressure Gages: Manufacturer's standard to FS-GG-G-76, black letters on
white background, 2 inch diameter, stem mounted with suitable dial range.
E.
Diaphragm Control and Instrument Valves: 1/4 and 3/8 inch forged brass body with reinforced teflon diaphragm, stainless steel spring, and color coded phenolic handle.
F.
Gage Cocks: Tee or lever handle, bronze, rated for 125 psig.
G.
Relays: For summing, reversing, amplifying, highest or lowest pressure selection, with
fixed 1:1 or adjustable input/output ratio.
H.
Switches: With indicating plates, accessible adjustment, calibrated and marked.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.
B.
Verify that pneumatic piping and duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are
installed before proceeding with installation.
GENERAL
A.
3.3
The Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) shall be designed, installed, and
commissioned in a turnkey fully implemented and operational manner; including all
installation labor and programming.
CONTROL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Provide DDC/electronic direct digital systems of control. Provide necessary relays,
mounting brackets, gauges, switches and accessories required, even though not
specifically called for, as to result in complete workable systems.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 26
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.4
B.
FMCS Contractor shall install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions, all applicable codes, and recognized industry practices.
C.
Install complete control wiring systems in accordance with applicable electric sections
included in this specification.
D.
After completion of installation test, adjust and demonstrate proper operation and
compliance with the specification control equipment. Submit data showing set points and
final adjustments of controls.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of
programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
B.
Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation
specified.
C.
Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with
Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches (1220 mm)
above the floor.
1.
D.
Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Entrances.
Public areas.
Where indicated.
E.
Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
F.
Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to
outdoor temperatures.
G.
Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23
Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
H.
Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23
Section "Hydronic Piping."
I.
Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct
Accessories."
J.
Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 26.
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A.
General:
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 27
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
3.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Wiring of all field devices, and electrical devices to Local Control Panels (LCP),
and Distributed Processing Units (DPU).
All communication wiring from existing EMS/SCADA to new DPUs.
All wiring of LCPs including but not limited to EP’s, I/P's, VPTs, DPTs, pilot
lights, relays, transformers and other miscellaneous devices as shown and
specified.
All power wiring (120 VAC) of field devices as required.
All miscellaneous control wiring.
Signal and communication cable installation:
1.
Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and
piping are exposed.
2.
Install exposed cable in raceway.
3.
Install concealed cable in raceway.
4.
Bundle and harness multi-conductor instrument cable in place of single cables
where several cables follow a common path.
5.
Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect
against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6.
Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of
control system, except local individual room control cables.
7.
Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for
vibration of piping and equipment.
C.
Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions.
Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
D.
Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when
switch is in hand position.
E.
Except for motor feeders and for existing wiring between motors, motor controllers,
feeder panels, fuses, circuits breakers and buss bars, all of the electrical work required for
the facility management control system including but not limited to time switches,
damper motors, damper switches, electric thermostats, electric relays, interlocking
wiring, wire, conduit, etc. shall be provided and installed by the FMCS Contractor. It
shall be the FMCS Contractor’s responsibility to provide all wiring required to achieve
the functions called for in these specifications.
PNEUMATIC PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install copper piping in mechanical equipment rooms inside mechanical equipment
enclosures, in pipe chases, or suspended ceilings with easy access.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 28
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
B.
Install terminal single-line connections, less than 18 inches (460 mm) in length, with
polyethylene tubing run inside flexible steel protection.
C.
In concealed locations such as pipe chases and suspended ceilings with easy access,
install polyethylene bundled and sheathed tubing. Electrical metallic tubing materials
and installation requirements are specified in Section "Raceways and Boxes."
D.
In concrete slabs, furred walls, or ceilings with no access, install copper or polyethylene
tubing in electrical metallic tubing or vinyl-jacketed polyethylene tubing.
1.
Install polyethylene tubing in electrical metallic tubing extending 6 inches (150
mm) above floor line; pull tubing into electrical metallic tubing.
E.
Install tubing with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of
piping and equipment.
F.
Purge tubing with dry, oil-free compressed air before connecting control instruments.
1.
Bridge cabinets and doors with flexible connections fastened along hinge side;
protect against abrasion. Tie and support tubing.
G.
Number-code or color-code control air piping for future identification and service of
control system, except local individual room control tubing.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and
retest.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
Pressure test control air piping at 30 psig (207 kPa) or 1.5 times the operating
pressure for 24 hours, with maximum 5-psig (35-kPa) loss.
Pressure test high-pressure control air piping at 150 psig (1034 kPa) and lowpressure control air piping at 30 psig (207 kPa) for 2 hours, with maximum 1psig (7-kPa) loss.
Test calibration of [electronic] controllers by disconnecting input sensors and
stimulating operation with compatible signal generator.
Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating
control set points are as required.
Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with
sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions.
Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
Test software and hardware interlocks.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 29
Burns Engineering, Inc.
C.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
DDC Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak
checks.
Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.
Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation,
insertion depth, and other applicable considerations.
Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.
Check installation of air supply for each instrument.
Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify
that inlet side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.
Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and
self-contained pressure regulators.
Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.
Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.
Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that
proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.
Check DDC system as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
3.8
Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power
supply, if applicable.
Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service
designation and approved tagging system.
Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.
Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing
procedures.
ADJUSTING
A.
Calibrating and Adjusting:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Calibrate instruments.
Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog
instrument.
Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written
recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at
least double that of instrument being calibrated.
Control System Inputs and Outputs:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent
output.
Check digital inputs using jumper wire.
Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or
breaking.
Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span
using a precision-resistant source.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 30
Burns Engineering, Inc.
5.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Flow:
a.
b.
6.
Pressure:
a.
b.
7.
b.
9.
10.
11.
3.9
Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable
differential set at minimum.
Temperature:
a.
8.
Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values
with 3-point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.
Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break
contact.
Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of
span using a precision-resistance source.
Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.
Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the
manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent
open and closed.
Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following
manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and
100 percent closed.
Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.
Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each
type of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating
startup procedures.
B.
Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
C.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy
hours for this purpose.
TRAINING
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
B.
All training shall be by the FMCS manufacturer and shall utilize specified manuals, asbuilt documentation, and the on-line help utility.
C.
Operator training shall include two eight-hour sessions (one spring, one fall)
encompassing:
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 31
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
3.10
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Sequence of Operation review.
Sign on-Sign off
Selection of all displays and reports.
Commanding of points, keyboard and mouse mode.
Modifying English text.
Use of all dialog boxes and menus.
Modifying alarm limits and start-stop times.
System initialization.
Download and initialization of remote controllers.
Purge and/or dump of historical data.
Troubleshooting of sensors (determining bad sensors).
Password modification.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Before control and monitoring systems are closed out a point-to-point verification, from
the field devices to EBI should take place. The system controls should be tested at each
unit level, AHU and Hydraulic system, etc.
B.
There will be a verification test of blackout startup of the system. Also operation under
abnormal conditions, as emergency power, etc.
C.
The contractor shall submit three binders and electronic copies of Operations and
Maintenance Manuals as described in this section
END OF SECTION 230900
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 32
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 230200 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
B.
Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
C.
Section 230713 – Mechanical Insulation.
D.
Section 232116 - Hydronic Specialties.
REFERENCES
A.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
1.
2.
B.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.
C.
1.4
AWS standards as required by this specification.
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS)
1.
2.
3.
1.3
ASTM standards as required by this specification.
American Welding Society (AWS)
1.
D.
ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping.
Other ASME standards as required by this specification.
MSS SP58: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.
MSS SP69: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
MSS SP89: Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.
Provide manufacturer's catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining
procedures.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.5
A.
Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system components are
compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide
necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are
consistently provided and will be accessible upon completion of construction.
B.
Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus
connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment, or
other apparatus.
C.
Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in open
systems.
D.
Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASTM B31.9 unless indicated
otherwise.
E.
Use ball, butterfly or gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or
vertical risers.
F.
Use ball or globe valves for throttling, bypass or manual flow control services.
G.
Use 3/4-inch ball or gate valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of
piping, bases of vertical rises, and at equipment.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
1.6
1.7
1.8
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly
views.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum 5 years' document experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 10
years' document experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping system.
B.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Section IX and applicable state
labor regulations.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.
B.
C.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
D.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
E.
Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SECONDARY CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN
A.
2” NPS and smaller:
1.
Pipe: Seamless copper water tube, ASTM B 88, Type K, hard.
2.
Fittings:
3.
B.
2.2
a.
Wrought-copper solder joint fittings, Class 150, ANSI Standard B 16.18,
ASME/ANSI B 16.22 and ASTM B 4 copper pipe nipples with threaded
end connections,
b.
Press Fittings, Class 150, conforming to ANSI Standard B 16.18,
ASME/ANSI B 16.22 and comply with performance criteria of IAPMO
PS 117. Sealing element shall be EPDM.
Soldered using ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin-antimony or Grade Sn 96 tin-silver and flux
containing not more than 0.2% lead.
2-1/2” and larger:
1.
Pipe: Black steel pipe, ASTM A 53/106 Grade B, seamless Schedule 40.
2.
Fittings: Steel butt-welding fittings, ANSI standard B 16.9 using long-turn ells,
ANSI standard B 16.5 weld-neck or slip-on flanges and Bonney Forge Weldolets
and threadolets, wall thickness to match piping.
3.
Joints: Welded engineering standards of the Mechanical Contractors Association
of America, Inc. Part VII Standard Procedure Specification 1 & 2.
HEATING AND RE-HEAT WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN
A.
2” NPS and smaller:
1.
Pipe: Black steel pipe, ASTM A 53/106 Grade B, seamless Schedule 40.
a.
b.
2.
HYDRONIC PIPING
Fittings: Black, malleable iron-screwed fittings, 68 kg, ANSI Standard B
16.3 for less than 517 kPa and 136 kg for 517 Kpa or more
Joints: Threaded using American Standard for pipe threads, ANSI
Standard B 2.1.
Pipe: Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K
232113 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
2.3
2.4
a.
Fittings: Wrought-copper solder joint fittings, Class 150, ANSI Standard
B 16.18 or ASME/ANSI B 16.22 and ASTM B 4 copper pipe nipples
with threaded end connections.
b.
Press Fittings, Class 150, conforming to ANSI Standard B 16.18,
ASME/ANSI B 16.22 and comply with performance criteria of IAPMO
PS 117, sealing element shall be EPDM.
2 ½” NPS and Larger:
1.
Pipe: Black steel pipe, ASTM A 53/106 Grade B, seamless Schedule 40.
2.
Fittings: Steel butt-welding fittings, ANSI standard B 16.9 using long-turn ells,
ANSI standard B 16.5 weld-neck or slip-on flanges and Bonney Forge Weldolets
and threadolets, wall thickness to match piping.
3.
Joints: Welded engineering standards of the Mechanical Contractors Association
of America, Inc. Part VII Standard Procedure Specification 1 & 2
BYPASS CHEMICAL FEEDER
A.
Description: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity; with
fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
B.
Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent
accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.
CONDENSATE DRAIN FROM EQUIPMENT
A.
All sizes:
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Pipe: Copper drainage tubing, drain, waste and vent, (DVW) ASTM B 306
Fittings: Wrought copper and bronze drainage fittings, ANSI Standards B 16.23,
ANSI/ASME B 16.29 or ANSI/ASME B16.32.
Joints: Soldered using ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin-antimony or Grade Sn 96 tin-silver
and flux containing not more than 0.2% lead.
OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Equipment Drains and Overflows: Galvanized steel, ASTM A53, Schedule 40.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Fittings: Galvanized cast iron, or ASTM B16.3 malleable iron.
Joints: Threaded or grooved mechanical couplings.
Provide bronze hose cocks on drain lines; size to suit, where indicated on the
drawings; Nibco Model No. 74VB or equal.
Unions, Flanges, And Couplings
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
1.
Unions for Ferrous Threaded Pipe: 150 PSIG, malleable iron with bronze to iron
ground joints.
2.
Flanges for Ferrous Pipe: 150 PSIG forged steel, slip-on or weld neck with raise
face, ANSI B16.5.
a.
b.
c.
C.
Accessories
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Gaskets: Flat ring, type 304 stainless steel with non-asbestos filler, spiral wound,
flexitallic style CG or non-asbestos equal; 1/8” thick, for 150 or 250 lb. Flanges:
ANSI B16.5.
Bolting: Stud bolt with two nuts.
Stud Bolts: Continuously threaded ASTM A193, Grade B7.
Nuts: Hexagonal semi-finished heavy series, ASTM A194 Grade 2H
Carbonsteel, ASNI B18.2.2.
Threads: ANSI B31.1, Class 2.
Valve extensions: Provide valve stem extensions on all valve handles as required
to properly clear insulation thickeness. Modification of insulation around handle
will not be accepted.
Gate Valves
1.
Manufacturers: Milwaukee Valve; Nibco; Red-White Valve; Stockham
b.
E.
2” and Smaller: Bronze body ASTM B62, bronze trim, block pattern,
union bonnet, rising stem, solid wedge, Class 150, threaded or solder
ends.
Ball Valves
1.
Manufacturers: Conbraco; Nibco; Red-White Valve; Stockham
a.
F.
Gaskets: Ring type, factory cut and punched of 1/16" thick compressed
nitrile bonded, asbestos free fiber Klingersol C-4400.
Bolts:
Carbon steel, square head, ASTM A307 Grade B and
ANSI/ASME B1.1
Nuts: Carbon steel, semi-finished, heavy hex head, ASTM A563 Grade
A and ANSI/ASME B1.1.
½” to 2” Bronze Construction: Two-piece body, full port, bronze body
ASTM B584, stainless steel ball, reinforced TFE seat and packing, lever
handle, 600 PSI WOG, threaded or solder ends.
Butterfly Valves
1.
HYDRONIC PIPING
Resilient Seated Valves: 2-1/2” to 4”
a.
Manufacturers: Dezurik, Jamesbury, Watts, Cameron
b.
Lugged type, resilient seated butterfly valve. ANSI 150 cast iron body.
EPDM, terpolymer of ethylene propylene and adiene, seal and seat; seat
fully retained mechanically with retaining rings with bronze disc. 416SS
Shaft; 1 piece solid thru shaft, pinned to disc; Provide lever handles up to
232113 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
and including 4”. All valves located 6’-0” or more above the valve
access level shall be fitted with chain operators.
2.
High Performance Butterfly Valves: 6” and above
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
DeZurik HP.
2)
Cameron HP.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
HYDRONIC PIPING
High performance butterfly valves, ANSI Class 150, shall be of the
lugged body style.
Bodies shall be of carbon steel. Bodies shall be designed to accept
interchangeable seats of PTFE.
Carbon steel ANSI Class 150 valves shall provide drip-tight shutoff to
285 psi.
Valves shall be of the single offset shaft/disc design to provide
uninterrupted 360 degree seating and to minimize pressure imbalance
applied to the disc during operation or at closure.
Lug body valve shall provide drip-tight shutoff to the full valve rating on
dead and/or isolation service without a downstream flange.
All valves shall be furnished with replaceable upper and lower
shaft/thrust bearings to assure disc centering in the seat without the use
of shims.
Bearings shall be of composite design with a 317 stainless steel carrier
and 317 stainless steel backed PTFE/fiberglass replaceable liners.
Valves to be furnished with adjustable v-ring packing of PTFE and an
externally adjustable packing gland. Packing gland, nuts, and studs shall
be stainless steel.
Shafts shall be of one piece design and shall be strain hardened type 316
stainless steel, or flash chrome plated 316 stainless steel in 24”-42”
valves, and shall be centerless ground to minimize bearing and packing
wear. Shaft diameters shall be large enough to prevent valve pressure
derating. Drive end of shaft shall be squared to provide a positive
actuator connection with minimum backlash or hysteresis and marked to
indicate disc position. Twenty-four inch (24”) and larger valves shall use
keyed shafts. Provide extended shafts with integral supports to assure
clearance between chain, and piping insulation (2”thick).
Valve seats shall be of PTFE with an integral titanium or innocent hoop
capable of service in temperature ranges of 0100 degrees to 450 degrees
F. Seat design shall be a dual-seal type with pressure assisted and
mechanical seat to disc sealing features and capable of drip-tight bidirectional shutoff.
Discs shall be designed with a concave face to reduce dynamic torque,
decrease turbulence and maximize flow capacity. Discs shall be 316
stainless steel polished casting.
Disc-to-shaft pins shall be of stainless steel and of the tangential or
compressive type. Pins shall be subject to compression forces only, no
shear forces only.
Valves and subcomponents, including castings, shall be of U.S.
manufacture. Material test reports for pressure retaining components
shall be kept on file by the manufacturer for a period of three (3) years
from the date of manufacture.
232113 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
o.
p.
Valve actuators shall provide external disc position indication.
Operators:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Valve mounted less than 6’-0”above finished floor or access
platform.
Handwheel rotary operator.
Valves mounted 6’-0” or higher above finished floor or access
platform; chain actuator.
Primary Chilled Water Choke Valve
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
DeZurik
VSI
Fisher
V-port Ball valve, ANSI Class 150 valve with 317SS body, PTFE Chevron
packing, 317SS nickel hardened ball, 2205 duplex SS shaft and 317 SS PTFE
bearings.
Choke valves must be sized for proper operation. Upstream/downstream pipe
sizes and pressures must be provided for optimal sizing calculations by Owner
and Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B.
Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D.
Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs
or caps.
E.
After completion, fill, clean, and add glycol mixture.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install piping to ASME B31.9.
C.
Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.
D.
Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.
E.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
F.
Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.
G.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
H.
Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of
insulation and access to valves and fittings.
I.
Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
J.
Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points and vent at high points. Provide
drain valves and vent valves. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level.
K.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush
clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.
L.
In accordance with paint manufacturer’s instructions. Prepare insulated surfaces and
unfinished piping, fittings, supports, and accessories for painting. Apply prime and finish
paints as directed by the paint manufacturer. Prior to painting, submit color selection and
manufacturer’s cleaning and application instructions for approval.
M.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
Provide nonconductive
CLEANING AND TESTING
A.
Prior to testing, all installed piping shall be free of mill scale, rust, contaminants and
debris, and shall be thoroughly flushed or blown out.
B.
After cleaning, but prior to application of insulation, all piping shall be hydrostatically
tested at 1.5 times the maximum system operating pressure. Test pressure shall be
maintained until a thorough examination is made of all welds, joints and connections, but
not less than a two-hour duration.
C.
The Contractor shall furnish all test equipment including a recorder to check and record
pressures during testing. The pressure recorder shall be approved by the Owner.
D.
Testing procedures shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
HYDRONIC PIPING
No test shall be performed until all anchors, hangers, supports, test gauges, test
connections and blanks are installed. All tests shall be performed against blanks
and not closed valves.
Pressure testing shall not be applied to equipment that is connected to the piping
systems. Test pressure may be applied to piping specialties, accessories, and
inline equipment including expansion joints, strainers and valves providing the
test pressure does not exceed the maximum allowable test pressure of the
component.
Instrument piping and instruments located downstream of the first block valve
shall not be pressure tested.
232113 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
5.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Control valves shall always be in the open position during testing unless provided
with a bypass permitting application of pressure to both sides.
Lines containing check valves shall have the source of test pressure on the
upstream side or the valves shall be blocked open.
END OF SECTION 232113
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Manual air vents.
B.
Pressure and temperature (P/T) test ports.
C.
Circuit balancing valves.
D.
Air Control Devices
E.
Strainers
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Section 15181 - Hydronic Piping.
REFERENCES
A.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
1.
B.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.
1.4
Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies including
installation instructions and replacement parts lists.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.6
ASTM standards as required by this specification.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
ASME standards as required by this specification.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum 5 years experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site.
B.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
C.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
232116 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
D.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
E.
Protect piping system from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1
MANUAL AIR VENTS
A.
2.2
2.3
Brass body, knurled slotted handle, blowout-proof needle style valve, side vent, size ¼”
NPT, extended length optional, Flow Design, Inc. Model AV or approved equal.
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE (P/T) TEST PORTS
A.
Construction shall be brass body and brass cap with retainer strap. Minimum rating shall
be 1000 PSI at 250°F. Mounting ports for insulated pipe or equipment shall be ½” MPT
by minimum 2 ¾” long. Test ports shall be suitable to accept a 1/8” diameter
thermometer stem or pressure gauge adapter, and shall have dual EPDM internal seals.
B.
A readout meter kit shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the P/T ports. The kit shall
include: two bimetal thermometers with a dual scale of –10 to 100°C and 0 to 220°F and
accuracy of 0.5%; two pressure gauges with scale of 0 to 100 PSI and accuracy of +/3%; and a compartmentalized, protective carrying case.
C.
Acceptable manufacturers include Flow Design, Inc. and Victaulic TA Hydronics.
CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES
A.
Valves shall be the manual, Y-pattern globe type incorporating the functions of flow
measurement, flow balancing, positive, drip tight shut off, and draining with a hose bib
fitting. Flow adjustment shall be accomplished with a handwheel capable of a minimum
of four 360° turns and including a digital readout and tamper-proof memory feature.
B.
Pipe sizes ½” to 2” shall be of brass copper alloy construction with NPT, solder or union
connections, and rated for 300 PSIG at 250°F. Sizes 2 ½ “ to 3” shall be of ductile iron
construction with flanged ends (ASME 16.42 Class 150) rated 250 PSIG at 250°F, or
grooved ends rated for 350 PSIG at 250°F.
C.
Pipe sizes 4” and above shall be an averaging pilot tube flow measuring instrument with T
shaped cross section to allow flow separation at a fixed point, independent of flow rate,
pressure or temperature. Sensor shall consist of high and low pressure plenums.
D.
Sensor shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel and shall be mounted by
compression/threaded connection on the pipe. Flow measuring element shall be rated for
150 psig operating pressure. Flow measuring element shall be Rosemount Annubar Flow
Meter Model 485L.
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
232116 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
E.
Provide remote read Eagle Eye Flow Meter Model EFWF as manufactured by Dietrich
Standard for wall mounting complete with ¼ inch stainless steel sensing tubing, stainless
steel connecting hardware with a flow range of 1 to 10,000 GPM. Tubing shall be swagelok
or approved equal assembled with leak tight sealant per the manufacturers’
recommendations.
F.
Each valve shall be equipped with pressure/temperature test ports as described in
Paragraph 2.2 for use with test meter supplied by the manufacturer of the valves.
AIR-CONTROL DEVICES
A.
Diaphragm-Type Expansion Tanks:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum
operating temperature. Factory test after taps are fabricated and supports installed and
are labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,
Division 1.
Diaphragm: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to
maintain required expansion capacity.
Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.
Tangential-Type Air Separators:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump.
Taco, Inc.
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump.
Taco, Inc.
Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working
pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature.
Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into
expansion tank.
Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged
connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Blowdown Connection: Threaded.
Size: Match system flow capacity.
In-Line Air Separators:
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
232116 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Products, Inc.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump.
Taco, Inc.
Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to
maximize air separation.
Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.
STRAINERS
A.
Size 2” and under shall be Y-pattern, cast iron (ASTM A126) or bronze (ASTM B62)
body material, Type 304 stainless steel, 20 mesh screen, NPT or solder connections,
complete with hose end blowdown valve and cap.
B.
Size 2 ½” and over shall be Y-pattern, cast iron body with stainless steel, 20 mesh screen,
ANSI Class 125 flanged connections, complete with blowdown valve and plug.
C.
Acceptable manufacturers include Armstrong, Mueller, and Spirax Sarco.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Where larger air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes.
C.
Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.
D.
Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.
END OF SECTION 232116
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
232116 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B.
EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated
capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and
accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each pump.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Show pump layout and connections.
Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and
other anchorages.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data:
maintenance manuals.
For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Mechanical Seals: One set of mechanical seal(s) for each pump.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group.
ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.
TACO Incorporated.
B.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled,
end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump
and motor shafts horizontal.
C.
Pump Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable stainless steel wear rings, threaded
gage tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and
flanged connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and provide
attached piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting
piping or requiring the realignment of pump and motor shaft.
Impeller: Cast stainless steel enclosed type; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed
to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw.
Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.
Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a
stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket.
Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.
D.
Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration.
Couplings shall be center drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing
pump shaft or motor. EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.
E.
Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel;
removable; attached to mounting frame.
F.
Mounting Frame:
Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from
ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and
motor.
G.
Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.
1.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Enclosure: Open, drip-proof.
Enclosure Materials: Cast iron.
Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.
PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A.
Suction Diffuser:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Angle pattern.
175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting.
Bronze startup strainers.
Stainless-steel straightening vanes.
Drain plug.
Factory-fabricated support.
Triple-Duty Valve:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Straight pattern.
175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting.
Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.
Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROLS
A.
Pump motors shall be manufacturer provided and installed, Open Drip Proof, premium
efficiency (meets or exceeds EPAct requirements), 1750 RPM, single speed, 208V /
60HZ / 3P. Complete electrical characteristics for each pump motor shall be as shown in
equipment schedule.
B.
Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities,
sizes, and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
C.
Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance.
D.
Contractor shall coordinate with all Division 23 vendors to furnish one manufacturer for
the variable frequency controllers to ease maintenance and training for the Owner.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
ABB
Schneider Altivar
Yaskawa
232123 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete
unit and arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3phase induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency. Equipment
motors shall be matched to the drive so that stable operation and avoidance of
overheating at low speeds can be realized. Refer to section 230513 “Common
Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment”.
Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency
throughout voltage range.
VFD shall be furnished with integral fused disconnect switch.
Unit Operating Requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
6.
7.
Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1
speed range.
Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
8.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.
Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.
Self-Protection and Reliability Features:
a.
b.
8.
Input ac voltage tolerance of 208 V, plus or minus 5 percent.
Input frequency tolerance of 06/11 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.
Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.
Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent.
Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0
times the base load current for 3 seconds.
Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.
Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors.
Under-voltage and overvoltage trips; inverter over-temperature,
overload, and overcurrent trips.
Adjustable motor overload relays capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class 20
performance.
Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load
combination at a natural frequency of the combination.
Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.
Loss-of-phase protection.
Reverse-phase protection.
Short-circuit protection.
Motor over-temperature fault.
Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on
return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset
or fault correction. Bidirectional autospeed search shall be capable of starting
into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in
proper direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load.
232123 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a
power interruption until motor has stopped.
Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5
times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at
slow speeds.
Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fallback
based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fanventilated motors at slow speeds.
Line Conditioning and Filtering: Include internal mounted components to
mitigate harmonic distortion, provide protection from input transients and reduce
EMI/RFI emissions as required for each application. At a minimum, drives shall
include the following:
a.
The VFD shall have internal 5% impedance reactors to reduce the
harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients.
(i) The 5% impedance may be from dual (positive and negative DC bus)
reactors, or 5% AC line reactors.
(ii) VFD’s with only one DC reactor shall add an AC line reactor.
b.
EMI/RFI filters: All VFDs shall include EMI/RFI filters. The onboard
filters shall allow the VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall
meet product standard IEC/EN 61800-3 for the First Environment
restricted level with up to 100 feet of motor cable.
Door-mounted LED status lights shall indicate the following conditions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
14.
15.
Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches
with manual-speed-control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.
Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller
door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
16.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Power on.
Run.
Overvoltage.
Line fault.
Overcurrent.
External fault.
Output frequency (Hertz).
Motor speed (rpm).
Motor status (running, stop, fault).
Motor current (amperes).
Motor torque (percent).
Fault or alarming status (code).
Proportional-integral-derivative (PID) feedback signal (percent).
DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
Set-point frequency (Hertz).
Motor output voltage (volts).
Control Signal Interface (Coordinate with Controls Vendor):
232123 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
a.
b.
Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to
10 V or 0/4-20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs.
Remote signal inputs capable of accepting any of the following speedsetting input signals from the control system:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
c.
Output signal interface with a minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20
mA), which can be programmed to any of the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
d.
0 to 10-V dc.
0-20 or 4-20 mA.
Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.
Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
RS485.
Keypad display for local hand operation.
Output frequency (Hertz).
Output current (load).
DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
Motor torque (percent).
Motor speed (rpm).
Set-point frequency (Hertz).
Remote indication interface with a minimum of 2 dry circuit relay
outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:
(i) Motor running.
(ii) Set-point speed reached.
(iii) Fault and warning indication (over-temperature or overcurrent).
(iv) High- or low-speed limits reached.
17.
Communications (Coordinate with Controls Vendor): Ethernet interface (or as
required by controls manufacturer) allows VFC to be used with an external
system within a multi-drop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all
parameter settings of VFC to be programmed via BMS control. Provide
capability for VFC to retain these settings within the nonvolatile memory.
a.
12.
Integral Disconnecting Means: Door Interlocked, pad lockable, input
power NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker that will
disconnect all input power from the drive and all internally mounted
options.
Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless otherwise
indicated.
Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches:
NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.
Standard Displays:
(i)
(ii)
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Output frequency (Hertz).
Set-point frequency (Hertz).
232123 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
Motor current (amperes).
DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
Motor torque (percent).
Motor speed (rpm).
Motor output voltage (volts).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
pump installation.
C.
Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PUMP INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with HI 1.4 and HI 2.4.
B.
Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
C.
Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and
weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
D.
Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open
drain.
E.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with
requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-inPlace Concrete.”
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in
Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13
"Vibration Controls for HVAC."
Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and spring
hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.
1.
Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 230548
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 230529
"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
ALIGNMENT
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.
B.
Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor
shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between
motor feet and base frame.
C.
Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
D.
After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill
baseplate with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in
place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate
Heating Piping" and Section 232216 Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties." Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.
C.
Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
D.
Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
E.
Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.
F.
Install Y-type strainer, suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.
G.
Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between
pump casing and valves.
H.
Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or
install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.
I.
Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.
J.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
K.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Check piping connections for tightness.
Clean strainers on suction piping.
Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a.
b.
c.
5.
6.
7.
3.6
Verify bearing lubrication.
Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
Start motor.
Open discharge valve slowly.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.
END OF SECTION 232123
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
SECTION 232213 – STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes steam and condensate piping and specialties for systems up to 50
psig, inside the building.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
1.4
Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general
piping materials and installation requirements.
Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment"
for pipe supports, product descriptions, and installation requirements. Hanger
and support spacing is specified in this Section.
Division 23 Section “Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties” for specialty
devices such as traps and pressure reducing valves associated with the steam and
condensate systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
HP Systems: High-pressure systems operating at 50 psig or more.
B.
LP Systems: Low-pressure systems operating at less than 50 psig.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve and steam trap indicated, including
rated capacities and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support
assemblies, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops and their attachment to the
building structure. Include dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, methods
of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
C.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D.
Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include
the following:
STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
232213 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
E.
1.5
1.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
Maintenance Data: For steam traps, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for
materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the
appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 01.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of steam piping and suspension system components
with other construction, including light fixtures, hydronic piping, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate pipe sleeve installation for foundation wall penetrations.
C.
Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
D.
Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor
assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LP and HP STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS (ABOVE GRADE)
A.
Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53/106, Type S (seamless), Grade B,
Schedules 40 and 80, black steel, plain ends.
1.
2.
B.
Black, cast-iron threaded fittings, ANSI Standard B16.4, Class 250.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated
in piping applications articles.
Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: ASTM A 53/106, Type S (seamless), Grade B,
Schedules 40 and 80, black steel, plain ends.
1.
2.
Fittings: Steel butt-welding fittings, ANSI standard B 16.9 using long-turn ells,
ANSI standard B 16.5 weld-neck or slip-on flanges and Bonney Forge Weldolets
and threadolets, wall thickness to match piping
Joints: Welded engineering standards of the Mechanical Contractors Association
of America, Inc. Part VII Standard Procedure Specification 1 & 2.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
232213 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150 and 250,
including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end
connections, and facings:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Accessories
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Material Group: 1.1.
End Connections: Butt welding.
Facings: Raised face.
Gaskets: Flat ring, type 304 stainless steel with non-asbestos filler, spiral
wound, flexitallic style CG or non-asbestos equal; 1/8” thick, for 150 or
250 lb. Flanges: ANSI B16.5.
Bolting: Stud bolt with two nuts
Stud Bolts: Continuously threaded ASTM A193, Grade B7.
Nuts: Hexagonal semi-finished heavy series, ASTM A194 Grade 2H
Carbon Steel, ASNI B18.22
Threads: ANSI B31.1, Class 2
VALVES AND OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Gate Valves (Shutoff)
1.
Manufacturers: Velan; Stockham; Crane; Bonney Forge; Flowserve
a.
b.
B.
Globe Valves (Throttling)
1.
Manufacturers: Velan; Stockham; Crane; Bonney Forge; Flowserve
a.
b.
C.
2 ½” and Larger: Cast carbon steel body, ASTM A216, bolted bonnet,
OS&Y, rising stem, handwheel, single wedge; Class 150 and Class 300,
flanged ends.
2” and Smaller: Forged steel body, ASTM A105/F11, full port, bolted
bonnet, OS&Y, rising stem, handwheel, single wedge; Class 150 and
Class 300, threaded ends.
2 ½” and Larger: Cast carbon steel body, ASTM A216, bolted bonnet,
OS&Y; Class 150 and Class 300, flanged ends.
2” and Smaller: Forged steel body, ASTM A105/F11, full port, bolted
bonnet, OS&Y; Class 150 and Class 300, threaded ends.
Check Valves
1.
Manufacturers: Velan; Stockham; Crane; Bonney Forge; Flowserve
a.
2” and Smaller: Forged steel body, ASTM A105/F11, bolted cap, swing
check; Class 150 and Class 300, threaded ends.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
232213 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
b.
D.
2 ½” and Larger: Cast carbon steel body, ASTM A216, bolted cap, swing
check; Class 150 and Class 300, flanged ends
Ball Valves (Blowdown Only)
1.
Manufacturers: Conbraco; Nibco; Red-White Valve; Stockham
a.
½” to 3” Bronze Construction: Two-piece body, full port, bronze body
ASTM B584, stainless steel ball, reinforced TFE seat and packing, lever
handle, 600 PSI WOG, threaded or solder ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
LP AND HP STEAM PIPING AND VALVEAPPLICATIONS
A.
Steam Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe, with threaded joints.
B.
Steam Piping, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: Schedule 40 steel pipe, with welded joints
and flanges.
C.
Condensate Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 80 steel pipe, with threaded joints.
D.
Condensate Piping, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: Schedule 80 steel pipe, with welded
joints and flanges.
E.
All flanges, fittings and valves on piping serving high pressure steam (greater than 15psi)
shall be rated for Class 250/300.
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation requirements.
B.
Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.
C.
Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded
nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for
system drainage.
D.
Install steam supply piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction of
steam flow.
E.
Install condensate return piping at a uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction
of condensate flow.
F.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side down.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
232213 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
G.
Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to steam mains using 45-degree
fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. Use of 90degree tee fittings is permissible if 45-degree fittings are impractical. If length of branch
takeoff is less than 10 feet, pitch branch line down toward mains at a 0.4 percent grade.
H.
Install unions in piping NPS 2 and smaller adjacent to each valve, at final connections of
each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
I.
Install flanges in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger at final connections of each piece of
equipment and elsewhere as indicated.
J.
Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid
valve, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in
blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff
connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.
K.
Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
L.
Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points such as ends of mains, bottoms
of risers, and ahead of pressure regulators, control valves, isolation valves, pipe bends,
and expansion joints.
1.
2.
3.
4.
M.
3.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not
exceeding 300 feet where pipe is pitched down in direction of steam flow and a
maximum of 150 feet where pipe is pitched up in direction of steam flow.
Size drip legs at vertical risers same size as pipe and extend beyond rise. Size
drip legs at other locations same diameter as main. In steam mains NPS 6 and
larger, dirt leg size can be reduced, but to no less than NPS 4.
Install gate valve at drip legs, dirt pockets, and strainer blowdowns to allow
removal of dirt and scale.
Install steam traps close to drip legs.
Pitch condensate piping down toward flash tank. If more than one condensate pipe
discharges into flash tank, install a swing check valve in each line. Install thermostatic
air vent at top of tank. Install inverted bucket or float and thermostatic trap at lowpressure condensate outlet, sized for three times the condensate load. Install safety valve
at tank top. Install pressure gage, gate valve, and swing check valve on low-pressure
(flash) steam outlet.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet
long.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
232213 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint
construction requirements for threaded, welded, and flanged joints.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare steam and condensate piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during
test.
Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure
shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install
blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test
pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of
overpressure during test.
Perform the following tests on steam and condensate piping:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.6
Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping
20 feet or longer.
Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or
longer, supported on a trapeze.
Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
3.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of
damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible
with piping may be used.
While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release
trapped air. Use drip legs installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times
the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any
vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress
due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of
specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening,
repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no
leaks.
Prepare written report of testing.
ADJUSTING
A.
Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after steam and condensate system
balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
232213 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1.
2.
3.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.
Set temperature controls so equipment is calling for full flow.
CLEANING
A.
Flush steam and condensate piping with clean water. Remove and clean or replace
strainer screens.
END OF SECTION 232213
STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
232213 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING
232213 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 232216 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
Refer to Division 23 specification section “Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping” for steam
meters.
1.4
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes the following piping specialties for LP steam and condensate piping:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Strainers.
Steam traps.
Thermostatic air vents and vacuum breakers.
Separator.
Pressure-reducing valves.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Pressure-reducing and safety valve.
Steam trap.
Air vent and vacuum breaker.
Flash tanks.
Pressure reducing valves.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For valves, safety valves, pressure-reducing valves, steam
traps, air vents, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to the following:
1.
ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME
label. Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES
232216 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.3
VALVES
A.
2.4
Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping."
STRAINERS
A.
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
Armstrong International, Inc.
Barnes & Jones, Inc.
Dunham-Bush, Inc.
Hoffman Specialty.
Spirax Sarco, Inc.
Body: ASTM A 216, carbon steel, with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
End Connections: Threaded ends for strainers NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for
strainers NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20-mesh strainer.
Tapped blowoff plug.
CWP Rating: 600-psig working steam pressure.
STEAM TRAPS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Armstrong International, Inc.
2. Barnes & Jones, Inc.
3. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
4. Hoffman Specialty.
5. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
B.
Thermodynamic Traps:
1.
Body: Stainless steel with screw-in cap.
2.
End Connections: Threaded.
3.
Disc and Seat: Stainless steel.
4.
Maximum Operating Pressure: 600 psig.
C.
Float and Thermostatic Traps:
1.
2.
3.
Body and Bolted Cap: ASTM A 126, cast iron.
End Connections: Threaded.
Float Mechanism: Replaceable, stainless steel.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES
232216 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Head and Seat: Hardened stainless steel.
Trap Type: Balanced pressure.
Thermostatic Bellows: Stainless steel or monel.
Thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 45 deg F of superheat and resisting water
hammer without sustaining damage.
Vacuum Breaker: Thermostatic with phosphor bronze bellows, and stainless-steel cage,
valve, and seat.
Maximum Operating Pressure: 125 psig.
THERMOSTATIC AIR VENTS AND VACUUM BREAKERS
A.
Thermostatic Air Vents:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Armstrong International, Inc.
Barnes & Jones, Inc.
Dunham-Bush, Inc.
Hoffman Specialty.
Spirax Sarco, Inc.
Body: Cast iron, bronze, or stainless steel.
End Connections: Threaded.
Float, Valve, and Seat: Stainless steel.
Thermostatic Element: Phosphor bronze bellows in a stainless-steel cage.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
Maximum Temperature Rating: 350 deg F.
Vacuum Breakers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Armstrong International, Inc.
Dunham-Bush, Inc.
Hoffman Specialty.
Spirax Sarco, Inc.
Body: Cast iron, bronze, or stainless steel.
End Connections: Threaded.
Sealing Ball, Retainer, Spring, and Screen: Stainless steel.
O-Ring Seal: EPR.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig.
Maximum Temperature Rating: 350 deg F.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES
232216 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SEPARATOR
A.
2.8
Moisture separator shall be of the high efficiency internal baffle type having a pressure drop
that does not exceed and equivalent length of pipe. Separator shall be of steel construction in
accordance with Section VIII, Division I of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. ASME
Code Stamped for a maximum working pressure of 300 psig. A screwed bottom drain
connection shall be provided for the installation of a trap. Spirax Sarco Model S4A or approved
equal.
PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Spirax Sarco, Inc
2. Armstrong International, Inc.
3. Barnes & Jones, Inc.
4. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
5. Hoffman Specialty.
B.
ASME labeled.
C.
Size, Capacity, and Pressure Rating: Factory set for inlet and outlet pressures indicated.
D.
Description: Pilot-actuated, diaphragm type, with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff.
E.
Body: Cast iron.
F.
End Connections: Threaded connections for valves NPS 2 and smaller and flanged connections
for valves NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
G.
Trim: Hardened stainless steel.
H.
Head and Seat: Replaceable, main head stem guide fitted with flushing and pressure-arresting
device cover over pilot diaphragm.
I.
Gaskets: Non-asbestos materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Install shutoff duty valves at branch connections to steam supply mains, at steam supply
connections to equipment, and at the outlet of steam traps.
B.
Install safety valves on pressure-reducing stations and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to nearest floor
drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES
232216 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
B.
Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 full port-ball valve, and short NPS 3/4
threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for
system drainage.
C.
Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
D.
Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere
as indicated.
E.
Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
F.
Install strainers on supply side of control valves, pressure-reducing valves, traps, and elsewhere
as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and full port ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers
NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blow-off connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.
3.3
STEAM-TRAP INSTALLATION
A.
Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as possible to connected equipment.
B.
Install full-port ball valve, strainer, and union upstream from trap; install union, check valve,
and full-port ball valve downstream from trap unless otherwise indicated.
3.4
SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install safety valves according to ASME B31.1, "Power Piping. Pipe safety-valve discharge
without valves to atmosphere outside the building.
B.
Install drip-pan elbow fitting adjacent to safety valve and pipe drain connection to nearest floor
drain.
C.
Install exhaust head with drain to waste, on vents equal to or larger than NPS 2-1/2
3.5
PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install pressure-reducing valves in accessible location for maintenance and inspection.
B.
Install bypass piping around pressure-reducing valves, with globe valve equal in size to area of
pressure-reducing valve seat ring, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install gate valves on both sides of pressure-reducing valves.
D.
Install unions or flanges on both sides of pressure-reducing valves having threaded- or flangedend connections, respectively.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES
232216 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
E.
Install pressure gages on low-pressure side of pressure-reducing valves after the bypass
connection according to Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
F.
Install strainers upstream for pressure-reducing valve.
G.
Install seperators upstream for pressure-reducing valve.
H.
Install safety valve downstream from pressure-reducing valve station.
3.6
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
B.
Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are
installed, only one bypass is required.
C.
Install vacuum breakers downstream from control valve, close to coil inlet connection.
END OF SECTION 232216
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING SPECIALTIES
232216 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 232223 - STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes steam condensate pumps, receiver, piping and fittings for a complete
condensate pump systems.
B.
CP-2 shall be a packaged system complete with duplex electric pumps, receiver, support skid,
piping and piping specialties, valves, strainers, site glasses and pressure gauges. The contractor
shall note that access to the mechanical room is limited and equipment shall be capable of field
disassembly and reassembly.
C.
For CP-1 serving the heating system shell and tube heat exchanger, the contractor has the option
of providing the shell and tube heat exchanger, piping, condensate pumps, receiver, traps, and
all supports and specialties complete in a packaged system provided the package can be
disassembled and reassembled in the field for rigging and installation in the mechanical room.
The pump and reservoir package shall fit below the heat exchanger with a maximum heat
exchanger mounting height of 60 inches to the condensate outlet on the heat exchanger shell.
Refer to Section 235700 and drawing schedule for heat exchanger performance data.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product include all materials of construction. Include certified
performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate operating point on curves. Include
receiver capacity and material.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
Provide complete shop drawing for each packaged or field piped systems with pump and
receiver layout, all piping connections and valves clearly shown for access.
Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and
other anchorages.
Include diagrams for equipment and manufacturers recommended piping for steam
condensate, venting, power, signal, and control wiring.
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
232223 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
maintenance manuals.
For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDENSATE PUMP – CP-1
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Bell and Gossett
2.
Spirax-Sarco Inc.
3.
Armstrong International, Inc.
B.
Description: Factory-fabricated, electric-powered simplex pumps with controls, valves, piping
connections, and accessories suitable for pumping steam condensate.
1.
ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label steam condensate receivers to comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
C.
Configuration: simplex pump with float-operated valve control.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Pump Body: Cast iron, ASME rated to 125 psig .
Piping Connections: Threaded; for steam condensate, operating medium, vent, and
indicated accessories.
Level Gage: Glass site gage with shutoff cocks.
Valves: Manufacturer's stainless steel check valves on inlet and outlet.
Internal Parts: Stainless-steel float, springs, and actuating mechanism.
Valve Seals: Replaceable from exterior.
Each pump shall be flange mounted to condensate receiver, and close coupled to a
vertical drip proof motor.
Mechanical Alternator
Receiver:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Factory mounted on steel supports.
Welded steel.
Flanged and Threaded piping connections.
Water-level gage and dial thermometer.
Pressure gage at pump discharge.
Bronze fitting isolation valve between pump and receiver.
Lifting eyebolts.
Inlet vent and an overflow.
Cast-iron inlet strainer with vertical self-cleaning bronze screen and large dirt pocket.
E.
Valves and Strainers: Spirax Sarco Fig. 12 strainer, M10S Ball Valve, stainless steel check
Valve.
F.
Capacities and Characteristics: CP-1
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
232223 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unit Total Capacity: 9 GPM .
Capacity, Each Pump:
a.
Discharge Head: 25 psig.
b.
Discharge Size: 3/4 NPS.
electrical:
a.
120V/1 phase
Receiver:
a.
b.
2.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Capacity: 6 gallons
Dimensions: 23”x31”x14”.
CONDENSATE PUMPS – CP-2
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Bell and Gossett
2.
Spirax-Sarco Inc.
3.
Armstrong International, Inc.
4.
Nicholson Steam Trap; a division of Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
5.
Spence Engineering Company, Inc.; Division of Circor International, Inc.
B.
Description: Factory-fabricated, pressure-powered pumps with mechanical controls, valves,
piping connections, and accessories suitable for pumping steam condensate using steam as
motive supply.
1.
ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label steam condensate receivers to comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
C.
Configuration: Simplex pump with float-operated valve control.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Pump Body: Cast iron, ASME rated to 125 psig .
Piping Connection: Threaded; for steam condensate, operating medium and indicated
accessories.
Level Gage: Glass site gage with shutoff cocks.
Valves: Manufacturer's standard check valves on inlet and outlet.
Internal Parts: Stainless-steel float, springs, and actuating mechanism.
Valve Seals: Replaceable from exterior.
Each pump shall be flange mounted to condensate receiver, and close coupled to a
vertical drip proof motor.
Receiver:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Factory mounted on steel supports.
Carbon Steel, ASME Design
Threaded piping connections.
Water-level gage and dial thermometer.
Pressure gage at pump discharge.
Bronze fitting isolation valve between pump and receiver.
Lifting eyebolts.
Inlet and outlet condensate connections.
Cast-iron inlet strainer with vertical self-cleaning bronze screen and large dirt pocket.
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
232223 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
E.
Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B or ASTM A 106/A 106M; Schedule 80; seamless
steel.
F.
Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125 cast iron, threaded.
G.
Valves and Strainers: Spirax Sarco Fig. 12 strainer, M10S Ball Valve, stainless steel check
valve.
H.
Capacities and Characteristics: CP-2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Unit Total Capacity: 18 GPM.
Capacity Pump:
a.
Discharge Head: 20 psig.
b.
Discharge Size: 2” NPS .
Electrical:
a.
120V/1Phase
Receiver:
a.
b.
Capacity: 14 gallons
Dimensions: 23”x23”x12”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
pump installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install pumps according to H 1.1-1.2, H 1.3, and H 1.4.
B.
Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
C.
Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
D.
Install thermometers and pressure gages.
E.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
Install pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements
for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete”.
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
232223 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in
Section 230548 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate
Heating Piping" and Section 232216 "Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties."
B.
Where installing piping adjacent to machine, allow space for service and maintenance.
C.
Install a globe and check valve and pressure gage before inlet of each pump and a gate and
check valve at pump outlet.
D.
Pipe drain to nearest floor drain for overflow and drain piping connections.
E.
Install full-size vent piping to outdoors, terminating in 180-degree elbow at point above highest
steam system connection or as indicated. Where indicated on drawings, connect to existing vent
piping.
F.
Install and connect electrical wiring in compliance with manufacturer installation requirements
and in accordance with division 26 specifications.
3.4
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Clean strainers.
Set steam condensate pump controls.
Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation.
Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before starting:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
6.
3.5
Set float switches to operate at proper levels.
Set throttling valves on pump discharge for specified flow.
Check motors for proper rotation.
Test pump controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning pump controls and equipment.
Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
Start steam condensate pumps according to manufacturer's written startup instructions.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain steam condensate pumps.
END OF SECTION 232223
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
232223 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
232223 - 6
Burns Engineering. Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
This section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:
1.
2.
1.4
Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.
Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty.
1.
Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Thermostatic expansion valves.
Solenoid valves.
Filter dryers.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes;
flow capacities; valve arrangements and locations; slopes of horizontal runs; oil traps;
double risers; wall and floor penetrations; and equipment connection details.
Show piping size and piping layout, including, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to
accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between
compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and
compliance with warranties of connected equipment.
Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.
Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 1
Burns Engineering. Inc.
1.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Welding certificates.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in
maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 2010 ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B.
Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
C.
Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."
1.8
PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Store piping with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when
installed.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 3 Section “Reinforced Concrete” for pad mounted equipment
and Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof mounted equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.
B.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C.
Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper
socket fittings on copper pipe.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 2
Burns Engineering. Inc.
F.
Flexible Connectors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Body:
Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced
protective jacket.
End Connections: Socket ends.
Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inchlong assembly.
Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A.
Service Valves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.
Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.
Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
End Connections: Threaded.
Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location
with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 115-V ac coil.
Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.3
Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.
Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.
Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
End Connections: Copper spring.
Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.
Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.
Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.
Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.
Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.
Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.
Superheat: Adjustable.
Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).
End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.
Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig.
REFRIGERANTS
A.
ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 3
Burns Engineering. Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A
A.
Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications:
Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.
B.
Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper
fittings with brazed joints.
3.2
VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A.
Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.
B.
Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if
they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.
C.
Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor
suction connection.
D.
Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter
dryers.
E.
Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve.
horizontal lines with coil at top.
F.
Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.
1.
2.
3.
Install solenoid valves in
Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do
not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line
pressure at bulb location.
G.
Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or
at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.
H.
Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an
integral assembly for device being protected:
1.
2.
3.
Solenoid valves.
Thermostatic expansion valves.
Compressor.
I.
Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve.
J.
Install flexible connectors at compressors.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 4
Burns Engineering. Inc.
3.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
B.
Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
G.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
H.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
J.
Refer to Division 15 Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of
Operation" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation.
K.
Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
L.
Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and
specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
M.
Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.
N.
Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical
injury.
O.
Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
P.
Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
Liquid lines may be installed level.
When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve
stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near expansion-valve bulb.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 5
Burns Engineering. Inc.
Q.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Before installation of steel refrigerant piping, clean pipe and fittings using the following
procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Shot blast the interior of piping.
Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through tubing
by means of a wire or electrician's tape.
Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe.
Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt.
Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube
or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint.
Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe.
Safety-relief-valve discharge piping is not required to be cleaned but is required to be
open to allow unrestricted flow.
R.
Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between
pipes for insulation installation.
S.
Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 15 Section " Identification."
T.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
U.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.4
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
1.
2.
Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper
pipe.
Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
D.
Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports."
E.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.
Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper
pipe.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 6
Burns Engineering. Inc.
F.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
3.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,
evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test
pressure.
Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the
pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.6
Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of
test.
Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount
of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are
achieved.
SYSTEM CHARGING
A.
Charge system using the following procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.
Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum
holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.
B.
Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 7
Burns Engineering. Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
C.
Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system
design temperature.
D.
Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.
Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.
Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow
rates and pressures are established.
END OF SECTION 232300
REFRIGERANT PIPING
232300 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
Double-wall rectangular ducts and fittings (Only if noted specifically on drawings)
Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.
Sheet metal materials.
Sealants and gaskets.
Hangers and supports.
Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing requirements for metal ducts.
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint
construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design
criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of the following products:
1.
2.
B.
Liners and adhesives.
Sealants and gaskets.
Shop Drawings:
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,
and attachments to other work.
Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.
Elevation of top of ducts.
Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
Fittings.
Reinforcement and spacing.
Seam and joint construction.
Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and
panels.
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration
isolation.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Sheet metal thicknesses.
Joint and seam construction and sealing.
Reinforcement details and spacing.
Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,
building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct
layout.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which duct will be attached.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.
Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
Sprinklers.
Access panels.
Perimeter moldings.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.
AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
C.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance:
Applicable requirements
Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
in
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse
Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
C.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal
Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
D.
Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types
and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable
sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.2
DOUBLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
B.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
Rectangular Ducts: Fabricate ducts with indicated dimensions for the inner duct.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
C.
Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse
Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
E.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal
Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
F.
Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or
NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg mean
temperature.
Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without
compressing insulation.
Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating.
Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.
Interstitial Insulation: Flexible elastomeric duct liner complying with ASTM C 534, Type II for
sheet materials, and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1.
Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
H.
Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch perforated galvanized sheet steel having 3/32-inch-diameter
perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent.
I.
Formed-on Transverse Joints (Flanges): Select joint types and fabricate according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1,
"Rectangular Duct/Traverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,
materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
J.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal
Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on
indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Lindab Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
SEMCO Incorporated.
Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B.
Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of
the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).
C.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,
and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
1.
D.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams,"
for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
1.
2.
E.
2.4
Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal
seams.
Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with buttwelded longitudinal seams.
Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct
construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
C.
2.5
Galvanized Coating Designation: G90
Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
1.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum
ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
SEALANT AND GASKETS
A.
General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index
of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B.
Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
Tape:
Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified
acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight
seal.
Tape Width: 4 inches.
Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
Service: Indoor and outdoor.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum.
For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Application Method: Brush on.
Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
9.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.
Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
Type: S.
Grade: NS.
Class: 25.
Use: O.
For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E.
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
F.
Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be
rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.
EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings
and fitting spigots.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electro-galvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized
rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D.
Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
E.
Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and
bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
G.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
H.
Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1.
2.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
Supports for Aluminum Ducts:
chromate.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and
calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and
Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E.
Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections.
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I.
Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.
J.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to
view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches.
K.
Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.
Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke
dampers.
L.
Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under
Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A.
Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B.
Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use
two-part tape sealing system.
C.
Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When
welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,
and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D.
Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E.
Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
3.3
DUCT SEALING
A.
3.4
Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct
Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports
within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E.
Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,
bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16
feet.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
F.
3.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air
Duct Accessories."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Leakage Tests:
1.
2.
3.7
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report
for each test.
Test the following systems:
START UP
A.
3.8
Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
for HVAC."
DUCT SCHEDULE
A.
Supply Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Return Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Pressure Class: Positive 4-inch wg. up to VAV Box; 2-inch w.g. downstream of
VAV Box
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Exhaust Ducts:
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel
Double-Wall Duct Interstitial Insulation:
1.
2.
G.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Intermediate Reinforcement:
1.
F.
Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:
1.
E.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Supply Air Ducts: 1-1/2 inches thick.
Return Air Ducts: 1-1/2 inches thick.
Elbow Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:
1)
2)
b.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:
1)
2)
3)
c.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1)
2)
3)
METAL DUCTS
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
233113 - 11
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
b.
c.
3.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a.
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments:
Comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 31, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have
proportionately fewer segments.
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
c.
H.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three
segments for 90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments
for 90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five
segments for 90-degree elbow.
Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.
Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam or Welded.
Branch Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
a.
b.
2.
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical
Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a.
b.
c.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 12
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 233300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
These specifications and the accompanying Contract Drawings are intended to cover the
furnishing of all labor, supervision, tools, equipment, materials, services, and related
items necessary to install ductwork and accessories.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
B.
Section 233113 - Metal Ducts.
REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
B.
NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.
C.
SMACNA - HVAC Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards - Metals and Flexible.
D.
Underwriters Laboratory (UL).
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials,
fabrication, and installation. Include catalog cuts of hardware, anchors, fastenings, and
accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of all ductwork
and other equipment which are not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data.
Ductwork shop drawings shall be 3/8 inch to 1 foot minimum scale.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes and Standards: Provide ductwork accessories conforming to the following codes
and standards:
1.
2.
3.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE).
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
a.
4.
90A
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
(SMACNA).
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
5.
1.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555, "Fire
Dampers and Ceiling Dampers."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept ductwork accessories on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect
for damage.
B.
Storage: Store ductwork accessories components in a clean, dry place. Protect from
weather, dirt, water, construction debris and physical damage.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
Provide min. 3” wide flexible duct connections with at least 1.5” of slack to inlet and
outlet of fans. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric
crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and fan. Make airtight joint. Provide
adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement,
and also capable of absorbing vibration of connected fan.
B.
Acceptable manufacturers shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Fire dampers shall be provided and installed at all places where duct passes through a
floor, fire wall, fire rated ceiling or other required fire division, or as required by
applicable codes (NFPA 90A).
B.
Provide fire damper of types and sizes indicated. Construct casings of 11-gauge
galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish. Provide fusible link rated at 165
degrees F unless otherwise indicated. Provide damper with positive lock in closed
position and with the following additional features:
1.
C.
2.4
American/Elgen Co.; Energy Division
Duro Dyne Corp.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
Ventifabrics, Inc.
Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain type (100 percent free area).
Acceptable manufacturers shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
Cesco Products
2.
Phillips-Aire.
3.
Ruskin Manufacturing Co.
4.
Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.
ACCESS DOORS
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
A.
2.5
2.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Minimum 22 gauge access doors of suitable sizes shall be furnished and installed for
access to fire dampers, backdraft dampers, reheat coils, etc., to permit inspection,
operation and maintenance of devices concealed behind the sheet metal work including
all controls. Doors shall be mounted in a heavy-hinged frame wherever possible.
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A.
Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations.
B.
Frame: 0.050 inches thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners.
C.
Blades: 0.025 inches thick, roll-formed aluminum.
D.
Blade Seals: Felt.
E.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
F.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
G.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS
A.
General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper
blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
1.
B.
Standard Volume Dampers: 12” high or larger shall be multiple – opposed blade type.
Dampers 11” high or smaller shall be single blade type with linkage outside airstream,
and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1.
C.
Pressure Classifications of 1 inch w.g. or Higher: End bearings or other seals for
ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of
operating shaft.
2.
Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 16 gage
thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for
attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in duct
Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 16 gage thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
3.
4.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Jackshaft: 1 inch diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing assembly
mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
1.
Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each
damper of a multiple-damper assembly.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
D.
2.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32 inch
thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4 inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit
damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
TURNING VANES
A.
Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and
Flexible."
B.
Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2 inch wide, curved blades set 3/4 inch
on center; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches on center; and set into
side strips suitable for mounting in ducts. All square elbows must be constructed with
single thickness turning vanes.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install all ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
approved shop drawings.
B.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section
233113, "Metal Ducts" for duct construction.
C.
Provide duct test holes as required for testing and balancing purposes.
D.
Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with
fans as shown on the drawings.
E.
Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install
dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat
channel.
F.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
G.
Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.
H.
Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and
maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
On both sides of duct coils.
At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
At drain pans and seals.
Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers,
and equipment.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
I.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall
fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible
links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for
access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access
doors installed downstream from dampers.
At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.
Upstream and downstream from turning vanes.
Upstream or downstream from duct silencers.
Control devices requiring inspection.
Elsewhere as indicated.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
1.
Access Door Size shall be minimum 18”x18” or as large as permitted by duct
size.
J.
Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
K.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
L.
For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors
with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
M.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of
flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
N.
Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of
flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
O.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts draw bands.
END OF SECTION 233300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
In-line centrifugal fans.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.
B.
Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
Certified fan sound-power ratings.
Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
Roof curbs.
Fan speed controllers.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the
items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.6
Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.
Ceiling suspension assembly members.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.8
Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the
AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C.
UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for
restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.
1.9
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
C.
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Hartzell Fan Incorporated.
Loren Cook Company.
PennBarry.
B.
Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges,
and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C.
Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure
around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of
fan housing.
D.
Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
E.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Variable-Speed Controller: Refer to section 2.4 below.
Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard
for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.
Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel.
a.
b.
2.2
MOTORS
A.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment."
1.
B.
2.3
Type: Spring hangers.
Static Deflection: 1.5 inches
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
A.
In line centrifugal fan motor shall be manufacturer provided and installed, Open Drip
Proof, premium efficiency (meets or exceeds EPAct requirements), 1750 RPM, single
speed, 208V / 60HZ / 3P. Complete electrical characteristics for each pump motor shall
be as shown in equipment schedule.
B.
Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities,
sizes, and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
C.
Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance.
D.
Contractor shall coordinate with all Division 23 vendors to furnish one manufacturer for
the variable frequency controllers to ease maintenance and training for the Owner.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete
unit and arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3phase induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency. Equipment
motors shall be matched to the drive so that stable operation and avoidance of
overheating at low speeds can be realized. Refer to section 230513 “Common
Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment”.
Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency
throughout voltage range.
VFD shall be furnished with integral fused disconnect switch.
Unit Operating Requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
6.
7.
Input ac voltage tolerance of 208 V, plus or minus 5 percent.
Input frequency tolerance of 06/11 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.
Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.
Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent.
Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0
times the base load current for 3 seconds.
Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.
Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1
speed range.
Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
8.
ABB
Schneider Altivar
Yaskawa
Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.
Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.
Self-Protection and Reliability Features:
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors.
Under-voltage and overvoltage trips; inverter over-temperature,
overload, and overcurrent trips.
Adjustable motor overload relays capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class 20
performance.
Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load
combination at a natural frequency of the combination.
Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.
Loss-of-phase protection.
Reverse-phase protection.
Short-circuit protection.
Motor over-temperature fault.
Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on
return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset
or fault correction. Bidirectional autospeed search shall be capable of starting
into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in
proper direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load.
Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a
power interruption until motor has stopped.
Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5
times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at
slow speeds.
Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fallback
based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fanventilated motors at slow speeds.
Line Conditioning and Filtering: Include internal mounted components to
mitigate harmonic distortion, provide protection from input transients and reduce
EMI/RFI emissions as required for each application. At a minimum, drives shall
include the following:
a.
The VFD shall have internal 5% impedance reactors to reduce the
harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients.
(i)
(ii)
b.
13.
The 5% impedance may be from dual (positive and negative DC bus)
reactors, or 5% AC line reactors.
VFD’s with only one DC reactor shall add an AC line reactor.
EMI/RFI filters: All VFDs shall include EMI/RFI filters. The onboard
filters shall allow the VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall
meet product standard IEC/EN 61800-3 for the First Environment
restricted level with up to 100 feet of motor cable.
Door-mounted LED status lights shall indicate the following conditions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Power on.
Run.
Overvoltage.
Line fault.
Overcurrent.
External fault.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
14.
15.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches
with manual-speed-control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.
Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller
door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
16.
Output frequency (Hertz).
Motor speed (rpm).
Motor status (running, stop, fault).
Motor current (amperes).
Motor torque (percent).
Fault or alarming status (code).
Proportional-integral-derivative (PID) feedback signal (percent).
DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
Set-point frequency (Hertz).
Motor output voltage (volts).
Control Signal Interface (Coordinate with Controls Vendor):
a.
b.
Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to
10 V or 0/4-20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs.
Remote signal inputs capable of accepting any of the following speedsetting input signals from the control system:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
c.
Output signal interface with a minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20
mA), which can be programmed to any of the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
d.
0 to 10-V dc.
0-20 or 4-20 mA.
Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.
Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
RS485.
Keypad display for local hand operation.
Output frequency (Hertz).
Output current (load).
DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
Motor torque (percent).
Motor speed (rpm).
Set-point frequency (Hertz).
Remote indication interface with a minimum of 2 dry circuit relay
outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:
(i) Motor running.
(ii) Set-point speed reached.
(iii) Fault and warning indication (over-temperature or overcurrent).
(iv) High- or low-speed limits reached.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
17.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Communications (Coordinate with Controls Vendor): Ethernet interface (or as
required by controls manufacturer) allows VFC to be used with an external
system within a multi-drop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all
parameter settings of VFC to be programmed via BMS control. Provide
capability for VFC to retain these settings within the nonvolatile memory.
a.
12.
Integral Disconnecting Means: Door Interlocked, pad lockable, input
power NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker that will
disconnect all input power from the drive and all internally mounted
options.
Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless otherwise
indicated.
Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches:
NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.
Standard Displays:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
2.4
Output frequency (Hertz).
Set-point frequency (Hertz).
Motor current (amperes).
DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
Motor torque (percent).
Motor speed (rpm).
Motor output voltage (volts).
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified
Ratings Seal.
B.
Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified
Ratings Seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in
Section 230548 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
C.
Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Section 077200
"Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
D.
Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
E.
Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers having a
static deflection of 1.5 inches. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section 230548
"Vibration Controls for HVAC."
F.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
G.
Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air
Duct Accessories."
B.
Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
Adjust belt tension.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to
indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
C.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
equipment.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B.
Adjust belt tension.
C.
Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"
for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
D.
Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
E.
Lubricate bearings.
END OF SECTION 233423
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Fan-powered air terminal units.
Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities, furnished
specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Shop Drawings: For air terminal units.
attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic
restraints, and vibration isolation.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
1.
1.4
Air terminal units.
Liners and adhesives.
Sealants and gaskets.
Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
Ceiling suspension assembly members.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustic tile.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.
B.
1.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals:
1.
2.
1.6
Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes.
Instructions for adjusting software set points.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.7
Fan-Powered-Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s) for each filter installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
2.2
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
SERIES FAN-POWERED AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Environmental Technologies, Inc.
Price Industries.
Titus.
Trane; a business of American Standard Companies.
Tuttle & Bailey.
Configuration: Volume-damper assembly and fan in series arrangement inside unit casing with
control components inside a protective metal shroud for installation above a ceiling.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
C.
Casing: 0.034-inch steel double wall.
1.
Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 1-inch- thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner
complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested
according to ASTM E 84.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Cover liner with nonporous foil and perforated metal.
Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.
Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.
Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or
maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.
Fan: Forward-curved centrifugal.
Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with flow-sensing ring and peripheral gasket and selflubricating bearings.
1.
2.
Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 6-inch wg
inlet static pressure.
Damper Position: Normally open.
E.
Velocity Sensors: Multipoint array with velocity sensors in cold- and hot-deck air inlets and air
outlets.
F.
Motor:
1.
2.
3.
G.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
Type: Electronically commutated motor.
Fan-Motor Assembly Isolation: Rubber isolators.
Factory-Mounted and -Wired Controls: Electrical components mounted in control box with
removable cover. Incorporate single-point electrical connection to power source.
1.
2.
3.
Control Transformer: Factory mounted for control voltage on electric and electronic
control units with terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power
source.
Wiring Terminations: Fan and controls to terminal strip. Terminal lugs to match
quantities, sizes, and materials of branch-circuit conductors. Enclose terminal lugs in
terminal box that is sized according to NFPA 70.
Disconnect Switch: Factory-mounted, fuse type.
H.
Control Panel Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, with access panel sealed from airflow and
mounted on side of unit.
I.
Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based controller with
integral airflow transducer, room sensor and discharge air temperature sensor (where noted on
drawings). Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in
Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and shall have the following features:
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Occupied and unoccupied operating mode.
Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.
Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.
Communication with temperature-control system
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
specified
in
Section 230900
SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Environmental Technologies, Inc.
Price Industries.
Titus.
Trane; a business of American Standard Companies.
Tuttle & Bailey.
B.
Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a
protective metal shroud.
C.
Casing: 0.034-inch steel, double wall.
1.
Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 1-inch-thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner
complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested
according to ASTM E 84.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Cover liner with nonporous foil and perforated metal.
Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.
Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections, size matching inlet size.
Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or
maintenance; with airtight gasket.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.
1.
2.
Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 6-inch wg
inlet static pressure.
Damper Position: Normally [open] [closed].
E.
Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch, and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water
temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain valve.
F.
Direct Digital Controls: Bidirectional damper operators and microprocessor-based controller
and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in
Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and shall have the following features:
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, [spring return open] [powered open].
Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume controller with
electronic airflow transducer with multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory
calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
G.
Occupied and unoccupied operating mode.
Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.
Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.
Communication with temperature-control system specified in Section 230900
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
Room Sensor: Wall mounted with temperature set-point adjustment and access for
connection of portable operator terminal.
Control Sequence:
1.
2.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Suitable for operation with duct pressures between 0.25- and 3.0-inch wg inlet static
pressure.
System-powered, wall-mounted thermostat.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electro-galvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized
rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C.
Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
D.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and
bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
E.
Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
F.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for
units with aluminum casings.
2.5
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.
1.
Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum
factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B.
Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and
maintenance.
C.
Install wall-mounted thermostats.
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and
for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
D.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance.
B.
Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and
Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties," connect heating coils to supply with shutoff
valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union
or flange.
C.
Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Section 233113 "Metal Ducts.”
D.
Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.5
Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum
factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D.
Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.7
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer
to achieve proper performance.
Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
Verify that control connections are complete.
Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.
Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
END OF SECTION 233600
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.
Louver face diffusers.
Linear slot diffusers.
Fixed bar grilles.
Section 089116 "Operable Wall Louvers" and Section 089119 "Fixed Louvers" for fixed
and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control
dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1.
2.
1.4
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Ceiling suspension assembly members.
Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
Duct access panels.
Source quality-control reports.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
233713 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CEILING DIFFUSERS
A.
Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.
Material: Aluminum.
Finish: Baked enamel, color by architect.
Face Style: Three or four cone.
Mounting: T-bar.
Pattern: Fixed.
Louver Face Diffuser:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
Price.
Titus.
Tuttle & Bailey.
Price.
Titus.
Tuttle & Bailey.
Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.
Material: Aluminum.
Finish: Baked enamel, color by architect.
Mounting: T-bar.
Pattern: One-way, Two-way, Three-way, and Four-way core style (Refer to contract
drawings for diffuser schedule).
REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A.
Fixed Bar Register:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Price.
Titus.
Tuttle & Bailey.
Finish: Baked enamel, color by architect.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
233713 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with
installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 233713
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
233713 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
233713 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 235700 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes shell-and-tube heat exchangers.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
TEMA: Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail equipment
assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1.
2.
1.5
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints and for
designing bases.
Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to
supported equipment.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
Tube-removal space.
Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached.
B.
Product Certificates: For each type of shell-and-tube heat exchanger. Documentation that
shell-and-tube heat exchangers comply with "TEMA Standards."
C.
Source quality-control reports.
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
235700 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
D.
Field quality-control reports.
E.
Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Structural failures including heat exchanger, storage tank, and supports.
Faulty operation of controls.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.
a.
Shell-and-Tube, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:
1)
2)
Tube Coil: One year(s).
Other Components: One year(s).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.
TACO Incorporated.
B.
Description: Packaged assembly of tank, heat-exchanger coils, and specialties.
C.
Construction:
1.
2.
D.
Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
Fabricate and label shell-and-tube heat exchangers to comply with "TEMA Standards."
Configuration: U-tube with removable bundle.
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
235700 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
E.
Shell Materials: Steel.
F.
Head:
1.
2.
G.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Materials: Cast iron
Flanged and bolted to shell.
Tube:
1.
2.
Seamless copper tubes.
Tube diameter is determined by manufacturer based on service.
H.
Tubesheet Materials: Steel.
I.
Baffles: Steel.
J.
Piping Connections: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with heat-exchanger shell.
Attach tappings to shell before testing and labeling.
1.
2.
K.
Support Saddles:
1.
2.
3.
L.
2.2
NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and stainlesssteel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.
Fabricated of material similar to shell.
Fabricate foot mount with provision for anchoring to support.
Fabricate attachment of saddle supports to pressure vessel with reinforcement strong
enough to resist heat-exchanger movement during seismic event when heat-exchanger
saddles are anchored to building structure.
Capacities and Characteristics:
ACCESSORIES
A.
Hangers and Supports:
1.
Custom, steel supports and cradles for mounting on structural steel.
a.
2.
Minimum Number of Cradles:
Factory or Field-fabricated steel supports and cradles to ensure both horizontal and
vertical support of heat exchanger. Comply with requirements in Section 230529
"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B.
Shroud: Steel sheet.
C.
Miscellaneous Components for Steam Unit: Strainers, steam-control valve, steam trap, valves,
pressure gage, thermometer, and piping.
D.
Pressure Relief Valves: Cast iron or Bronze, ASME rated and stamped.
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
235700 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory Tests: Test and inspect heat exchangers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 01. Affix ASME label.
B.
Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating
before shipment.
C.
Heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural
rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers.
B.
Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify actual locations of piping connections
before equipment installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION
A.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
2.
Install heat exchangers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with
requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-inPlace Concrete."
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in
Section 230548 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
B.
Install heat exchangers on saddle supports.
C.
Heat-Exchanger Supports: Use factory-fabricated steel cradles and supports specifically
designed for each heat exchanger.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and
Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,
fittings, and specialties.
B.
Comply with requirements for steam and condensate piping specified in Section 232213 "Steam
and Condensate Heating Piping" and Section 232216 Steam and Condensate Piping
Specialties."
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
235700 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
C.
Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for tube removal, service, and maintenance.
D.
Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat
exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers.
E.
Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections.
F.
Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid connection and install pipe relief valves, full
size of valve connection, to floor drain.
G.
Install vacuum breaker at heat-exchanger steam inlet connection.
H.
Install hose end valve to drain shell.
I.
Install thermometer on heat-exchanger and inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements
for thermometers specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
J.
Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping. Comply with requirements
for pressure gages specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1.
2.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
B.
Heat exchanger will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
CLEANING
A.
3.6
After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers.
END OF SECTION 235700
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
235700 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
235700 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 237313 – MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.2
1.3
Modular Central Station Air Handling Units
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 230900 – Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
B.
Section 230713 – Mechanical Insulation.
REFERENCES
A.
AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
B.
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
C.
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
D.
AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
E.
AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters.
F.
ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
G.
ARI 430 - Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
H.
ARI 435 - Application of Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
I.
ASTMB117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray Apparatus.
J.
NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
K.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
L.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
M.
UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
N.
UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
O.
UL 1995 - Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment.
P.
UL 94 - Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances.
Q.
IBC 2000, 2003 - International Building Code.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.4
1.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
R.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
S.
NFPA 5000 - Building Construction and Safety Code.
T.
ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Code.
U.
ARI Standard 1060 - Rating Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment.
V.
GSA 2003 Facilities Standard - 5.9 HVAC Systems and Components.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with
current ARI 410 Standard.
B.
Certify air-handling units in accordance with ARI 430.
C.
ISO 9001 Certification.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit unit performance including: capacity, nominal and operating performance.
B.
Submit Mechanical Specifications for unit and accessories describing construction, components and options.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of
the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
Mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and adjacent
structural and mechanical elements.
Support location, type, and weight.
Field measurements.
D.
Submit shop drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operation and
service clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations. Indicate unit shipping split
locations, and split dimensions, installation and operating weights including dimensions.
E.
Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
F.
Submit data on electrical requirements. Include safety and start-up instructions.
G.
Submit sound data certified to ARI 260.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.6
1.7
1.8
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Unit shall be manufactured to conform to UL 1995 Standard and shall be listed by either
UL/CUL or ETL. Units shall be provided with listing agency label affixed to unit. In the
event the unit is not UL/CUL or ETL approved, the contractor shall, at his/her expense
provide for a field inspection by a UL/CUL or ETL representative to verify conformance.
If necessary, contractor shall perform modifications to the unit to comply with UL/CUL
or ETL as directed by the representative, at no additional expense to the owner.
B.
Certify air-handling units in accordance with ARI 430. If air-handling units are not certified in accordance with ARI 430, contractor shall be responsible for expenses associated
with testing of units after installation to verify performance of fan(s). Any costs incurred
to adjust fans to meet scheduled capacities shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
C.
Certify air-handling coils in accordance with ARI 410. If air-handling coils are not certified in accordance with ARI 410, contractor shall be responsible for expenses associated
with testing of coils after installation to verify performance of coil(s). Any costs incurred
to adjust coils to meet scheduled capacities shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.
B.
Units shall ship fully assembled up to practical shipping and rigging limitations. Units
not shipped fully assembled shall have tags and airflow arrows on each section to indicate
location and orientation in direction of airflow. Shipping splits shall be clearly defined on
submittal drawings. Cost associated with non-conformance to shop drawings shall be the
responsibility of the manufacturer. Each section shall have lifting lugs or shipping skid to
allow for field rigging and final placement of section.
C.
Deliver units to jobsite with fan motors, sheaves, and belts completely assembled and
mounted in units.
D.
Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
START-UP AND OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean,
filters in place, bearings lubricated , condensate properly trapped, piping connections verified and leak-tested, belts aligned and tensioned, all shipping braces removed, bearing
set screws torqued, and fan has been test run under observation.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
PART 2
2.1
The equipment manufacturer shall provide, at no additional cost, a standard parts warranty that covers a period of one year from unit start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first. This warrants that all products are free from defects in material and
workmanship and shall meet the capacities and ratings set forth in the equipment manufacturer's catalog and bulletins.
PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer must clearly define any exceptions made to Plans and Specifications. Any
deviations in layout or arrangement shall be submitted to consulting engineer prior to bid
date. Acceptance of deviation(s) from specifications shall be in the form of written approval from the consulting engineer. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for expenses
that occur due to exceptions made.
B.
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
McQuay: Vision
Trane: M-Series Climate Changer
York: Solutions
GENERAL
A.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Unit layout and configuration shall be as defined in project plans and schedule.
UNIT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Fabricate unit with heavy gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners. All panels, access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type gasket. Shipped loose gasketing is not allowed.
B.
Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; thermal broke
double wall assembly, injected with foam insulation with an R-value of not less than R13.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The outer panel shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel.
The inner liner shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel.
The floor plate shall be constructed as specified for the inner liner.
Unit will be furnished with solid inner liners.
C.
Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum
5 inches of positive or 6 inches of negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured
at the panel midpoint.
D.
The casing leakage rate shall not exceed .5 cfm per square foot of cabinet area at 5 inches
of positive static pressure or 6 inches of negative static pressure (.0025 m3/s per square
meter of cabinet area at 1.24 kPa static pressure).
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
E.
Module to module field assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeter internal splice joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minimize on-site labor and meet indoor air quality standards.
F.
Access doors shall be a minimum of 20 inches wide and 60 inches high (or full height of
unit) and shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two six inch long stainless steel piano-type hinges, latch and full size handle assembly. Access doors shall
swing outward for unit sections under negative pressure. Access doors on positive pressure sections, shall have a secondary latch to relieve pressure and prevent injury upon access.
G.
A 6-inch formed G60 galvanized steel base rail shall be provided by the unit manufacturer for structural rigidity and condensate trapping. The base rail shall be constructed with
12-gauge nominal for unit sizes 003 - 035 and 10-gauge nominal for unit sizes 040 - 090.
The following calculation shall determine the required height of the baserail to allow for
adequate drainage unless a larger size is required for rigging purposes. Use the largest
pressure to determine base rail height. [(Negative)(Positive) static pressure (in)] (2) + 4”
= required baserail height.
FANS
A.
Fan section shall be stacked above cooling coil as shown on drawings. Cooling coil section shall allow adequate downstream clearance for drainpan and to limit carryover of
moisture from the coil.
B.
Fan sections shall employ plenum fans with a minimum ACMA Construction Class of II.
Class III fan construction shall be used if the fan characteristic curve extends to within
10% of the fan’s Class II selection zone. Fan shafts shall be solid, coated with a rustinhibiting coating, and properly designed so that fan shaft does not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM. All fans shall be statically and dynamically
tested by the manufacturer for vibration and alignment as an assembly at the operating
RPM to meet design specifications. If fans are not factory-tested for vibration and alignment, the contractor shall be responsible for cost and labor associated with field balancing and certified vibration performance. Fan wheels shall be keyed to fan shafts to prevent slipping.
C.
Provide grease lubricated ball bearings selected for L-10 200,000-hour average life per
ANSI/AFBMA 9. Greasable bearings shall have lubrication lines extended to the drive
side of the unit. Lubrication lines shall be a clear, high-pressure, polymer to aid in visual
inspection. Extend both grease lubrication lines to drive side of unit and rigidly attach to
drive side bearing support with Zerk fittings. If extended lubrication lines are not provided, manufacturer shall provide permanently lubricated bearing with engineering calculations for proof of bearing life.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
D.
Fans shall be mounted on steel base rail isolation bases. Internally-mounted motor shall
be on the same isolation base. Fan and motor shall be internally isolated with 1.5 inch
minimum deflection spring isolators. In addition to fans and motors being internally isolated, the entire unit shall also be externally isolated from the building, including supply
and return duct work, piping, and electrical connections. External isolation shall be furnished by the installing contractor in order to avoid transmission of noise and vibration
through the ductwork and building structure. Refer to Specification Section 230548 “Vibration Controls for HVAC”.
E.
Fan modules shall have a minimum of one access door located on the drive side of the
unit to allow inspection and maintenance of the fan, motor, and drive components. Provide interior marine light with convenient receptacle.
F.
Belts shall be enclosed as required by OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910 to protect worker
from accidental contact with the belts and sheaves.
G.
MOTORS AND DRIVES
1.
2.
3.
4.
All motors and drives shall be factory-installed and run tested. All motors shall
be installed on a slide base to permit adjustment of belt tension. Slide base shall
be designed to accept all motor sizes offered by the air-handler manufacturer for
that fan size to allow a motor change in the future, should airflow requirements
change. Fan sections without factory-installed motors shall have motors field installed by the installing contractor. The installing contractor shall be responsible
for all costs associated with installation of motor, drive, and starter, alignment of
sheaves and belts, run testing of the motor, and balancing of the assembly.
Fan Motors shall be heavy duty, ODP, premium efficiency (93% minimum), operable at 208/60/3.
Motors shall be selected to operate continuously at 104 F (40 C) ambient without
tripping of overloads. Motors shall have a +/- 10 percent voltage utilization range
to protect against voltage variation. Motors shall be in compliance with EPACT
when applicable.
Manufacturer shall provide for each fan a nameplate with the following information to assist air balance contractor in start-up and service personnel in
maintenance:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.
Fan and motor sheave part number
Fan and motor bushing part number
Number of belts and belt part numbers
Fan design RPM and motor HP
Belt tension and deflection
Center distance between shafts
Refer to section 230513 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
for additional requirements.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
COOLING AND HEATING COILS
A.
Certification: Acceptable water cooling, water heating, steam, and refrigerant coils shall
be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and bear the ARI label. Coils exceeding the scope of the manufacturer’s certification and/or the range of ARI’s standard rating
conditions will be considered provided the manufacturer is a current member of the ARI
Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils certification programs and that the
coils have been rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410. Manufacturer must be ISO
9002 certified.
B.
Provide cooling coils as specified with performance as scheduled. Coils shall not exceed
8 rows or 450 feet per minute face velocity. Coils shall be a maximum of 10 feet long by
3-1/2 feet high and be capable of replacement without major rigging. Provide access to
coil(s) for service and cleaning. Enclose coil headers and return bends fully within unit
casing. Unit shall be provided with coil connections that extend a minimum of 5” beyond
unit casing for ease of installation. Drain and vent connections shall be provided exterior
to unit casing. Coil connections must be factory sealed with grommets on interior and
exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage and condensation inside panel assembly. If
not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coil connection grommets and sleeves.
Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary surface. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing
surface for tube to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid flow requirements.
Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.035 inch nominal tube wall
thickness, expanded into fins, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to minimize the effects of erosion and premature failure having a minimum
tube wall thickness of .025 inches.
Coil connections shall be seamless copper silver soldered to tubes with red brass
coil connections with MPT connection silver soldered to header. Each headershall contain a ¼” FPT drain and vent tapping. Fins shall be 0.10” thick die
formed aluminum. Fin density shall not exceed 10 fins per inch. Connection size
to be determined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting.
Vent and drain fittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air
handler. Vent connections provided at the highest point to assure proper venting.
Drain connections shall be provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.
Coil casing shall be a formed channel frame of galvanized steel.
Water heating coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning.
Enclose coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Unit shall be provided
with coil connections that extend a minimum of 5” beyond unit casing for ease of installation. Drain and vent connections shall be provided exterior to unit casing. Coil connections must be factory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to
minimize air leakage and condensation inside panel assembly. If not factory packaged,
Contractor must supply all coil connection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of unit without the need to remove and disassemble the
entire section from the unit.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary surface. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing
surface for tube to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid flow requirements.
Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.035 inch nominal tube wall
thickness, expanded into fins, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to minimize the effects of erosion and premature failure having a minimum
tube wall thickness of .025 inches.
Coil connections shall be seamless copper silver soldered to tubes with red brass
coil connections with MPT connection silver soldered to header. Each headershall contain a ¼” FPT drain and vent tapping. Fins shall be 0.10” thick die
formed aluminum. Fin density shall not exceed 10 fins per inch. Connection size
to be determined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting.
Vent and drain fittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air
handler. Vent connections provided at the highest point to assure proper venting.
Drain connections shall be provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.
Coil shall be furnished as an uncased galvanized steel track to allow for thermal
movement and slide into a pitched track for fluid drainage.
BASE-LEVEL DRAIN PANS
A.
Insulation shall be encased between exterior and interior walls. Units with cooling coils
shall have drain pans under complete cooling coil section that extend beyond the airleaving side of the coil to ensure capture of all condensate in section. Cooling coil drain
pans shall be sloped in 2 planes, pitched toward drain connections to ensure complete
condensate drainage when unit is installed level and trapped per manufacturer's requirements. See section 2.05, paragraph E for specifications on intermediate drain pans between cooling coils.
B.
Units with heating coils shall have a drain pan under complete heating coil section sloped
in 2 planes and pitched toward drain connections to ensure proper drainage during cleaning and to capture water in the event of a coil failure.
C.
All drain pan connections supplied by unit manufacturer including, piping, and piping
connections extending from stainless steel drain pans shall be constructed of stainless
steel. The contractor is responsible to ensure the unit is installed level, trapped in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements, and visually inspected to ensure proper drainage of condensate.
D.
Construct drain pans from stainless steel with cross break and double sloping pitch to
drain connection. Provide drain pans under cooling coil section. Drain connection centerline shall be a minimum of 3’’ above the base rail to aid in proper condensate trapping.
Drain connections that protrude from the base rail are not acceptable. There must be a
full 2’’ thickness of insulation under drain pan.
2.7
FILTERS
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.8
2.9
A.
Provide factory-fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit casings.
B.
Air filters shall consist of box or cartridge type filters and shall consist of (1) 30% (Merv
8) pre-filter followed by (1) 85% (Merv 13) final filter. Filters shall be side loading to
avoid the use of filter clips.
C.
Filter media shall be UL 900 listed, Class I.
D.
Manufacturer shall provide one set of startup filters.
DAMPERS
A.
All dampers shall be internally mounted. Dampers shall be premium ultra-low leak and
and thermally insulated. Dampers shall be Tampco series 9000 thermally insulated, airfoil design or equivalent for minimal air leakage (Leakage Class 1A at 1 in w.g.). and
pressure drop. All leakage testing and pressure ratings shall be based on AMCA Publication 500. Manufacturer shall submit brand and model of damper(s) being furnished.
B.
Two position dampers shall be parallel blade action. Modulating dampers shall be opposed blade action.
ACCESS SECTIONS
A.
2.10
18” minimum access section between upstream and downstream of chilled water coils for
inspection and cleaning of the unit drain pan, coils and fans sections shall be provided.
Procedure for proper access, inspection and cleaning of the unit shall be included in the
maintenance manual.
ADDITIONAL SECTIONS
A.
2.11
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
20 inch long Mixing Section shall be provided with top return air opening and rear outside air openings with parallel low leak airfoil damper blades as specified in Section 2.8
where shown on drawings. Refer to drawings for exact configuration.
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROLS
A.
Fan motors shall be manufacturer provided and installed, Open Drip Proof, premium efficiency (meets or exceeds EPAct requirements), 1750 RPM, single speed, 208V / 60HZ /
3P. Complete electrical characteristics for each fan motor shall be as shown in equipment schedule.
B.
Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities,
sizes, and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
C.
Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance.
D.
Unit shall be furnished with factory installed marine lights in each accessible section and
a GFI receptacle in each fan sections. Lights and receptacles shall be factory wired to
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
outdoor rated switches on the exterior of the cabinet at each light/receptacle location.
Electrical contractor shall furnish and install 120V power to each switch in the field.
E.
Air Handling Unit Manufacturer shall furnish Variable Frequency Controllers for supply
and return fans integral with unit. Where unit size allows, controllers shall be factory
installed, otherwise they shall be furnished to the contractor for field installation.
Contractor shall coordinate with all Division 23 vendors to furnish one manufacturer for
the variable frequency controllers to ease maintenance and training for the Owner.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete
unit and arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3phase induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency. Equipment
motors shall be matched to the drive so that stable operation and avoidance of
overheating at low speeds can be realized. Refer to section 230513 “Common
Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment”.
Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency
throughout voltage range.
VFD shall be furnished with integral fused disconnect switch.
Unit Operating Requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
6.
7.
Input ac voltage tolerance of 208 V, plus or minus 5 percent.
Input frequency tolerance of 06/11 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.
Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.
Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent.
Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0
times the base load current for 3 seconds.
Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.
Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1
speed range.
Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
8.
ABB
Schneider Altivar
Yaskawa
Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.
Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.
Self-Protection and Reliability Features:
a.
b.
Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors.
Under-voltage and overvoltage trips; inverter over-temperature,
overload, and overcurrent trips.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Adjustable motor overload relays capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class 20
performance.
Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load
combination at a natural frequency of the combination.
Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.
Loss-of-phase protection.
Reverse-phase protection.
Short-circuit protection.
Motor over-temperature fault.
Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on
return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset
or fault correction. Bidirectional autospeed search shall be capable of starting
into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in
proper direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load.
Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a
power interruption until motor has stopped.
Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5
times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at
slow speeds.
Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back
based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fanventilated motors at slow speeds.
Line Conditioning and Filtering: Include internal mounted components to
mitigate harmonic distortion, provide protection from input transients and reduce
EMI/RFI emissions as required for each application. At a minimum, drives shall
include the following:
a.
The VFD shall have internal 5% impedance reactors to reduce the
harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients.
(i)
(ii)
b.
14.
EMI/RFI filters: All VFDs shall include EMI/RFI filters. The onboard
filters shall allow the VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall
meet product standard IEC/EN 61800-3 for the First Environment
restricted level with up to 100 feet of motor cable.
Door-mounted LED status lights shall indicate the following conditions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
15.
The 5% impedance may be from dual (positive and negative DC bus)
reactors, or 5% AC line reactors.
VFD’s with only one DC reactor shall add an AC line reactor.
Power on.
Run.
Overvoltage.
Line fault.
Overcurrent.
External fault.
Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches
with manual-speed-control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 11
Burns Engineering, Inc.
16.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller
door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
17.
Output frequency (Hertz).
Motor speed (rpm).
Motor status (running, stop, fault).
Motor current (amperes).
Motor torque (percent).
Fault or alarming status (code).
Proportional-integral-derivative (PID) feedback signal (percent).
DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
Set-point frequency (Hertz).
Motor output voltage (volts).
Control Signal Interface (Coordinate with Controls Vendor):
a.
b.
Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to
10 V or 0/4-20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs.
Remote signal inputs capable of accepting any of the following speedsetting input signals from the control system:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
c.
Output signal interface with a minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20
mA), which can be programmed to any of the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
d.
0 to 10-V dc.
0-20 or 4-20 mA.
Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.
Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
RS485.
Keypad display for local hand operation.
Output frequency (Hertz).
Output current (load).
DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
Motor torque (percent).
Motor speed (rpm).
Set-point frequency (Hertz).
Remote indication interface with a minimum of 2 dry circuit relay
outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:
(i) Motor running.
(ii) Set-point speed reached.
(iii) Fault and warning indication (over-temperature or overcurrent).
(iv) High- or low-speed limits reached.
18.
Communications (Coordinate with Controls Vendor): Ethernet interface (or as
required by controls manufacturer) allows VFC to be used with an external
system within a multi-drop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all
parameter settings of VFC to be programmed via BMS control. Provide
capability for VFC to retain these settings within the nonvolatile memory.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 12
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
a.
19.
Integral Disconnecting Means: Door Interlocked, pad lockable, input
power NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker that will
disconnect all input power from the drive and all internally mounted
options.
Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless otherwise
indicated.
Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches:
NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.
Standard Displays:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
Output frequency (Hertz).
Set-point frequency (Hertz).
Motor current (amperes).
DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
Motor torque (percent).
Motor speed (rpm).
Motor output voltage (volts).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation.
Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Examine roughing-in for steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and
electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
2.
B.
Install air-handling units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with
requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-inPlace Concrete." and on structural drawings.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in
Section 230548 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and
maintenance.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 13
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
C.
Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place.
temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.
D.
Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages
on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter
banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.
3.3
Replace
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.
D.
Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/4, ASTM B 88, Type M copper tubing. Extend
to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install
cleanouts at changes in direction.
E.
Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232113
"Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." Install shutoff valve and
union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at
each coil return connection.
F.
Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
C.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils with water, and test coils and connections
for leaks.
Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass
tests and inspections.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 14
Burns Engineering, Inc.
E.
3.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Prepare test and inspection reports.
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.
Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing
operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.
Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factoryrecommended lubricants.
Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone.
Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow.
Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain
minimum outdoor-air setting.
Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.
Install new, clean filters.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected duct systems are in fully open position.
Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Replace
fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B.
Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"
for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and
air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally
to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers,
coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 15
Burns Engineering, Inc.
3.8
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.
END OF SECTION 237313
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 16
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 237323 – MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.2
1.3
GENERAL
Modular Rooftop Air Handling Units.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 230900 – Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
B.
Section 230713 – Mechanical Insulation.
REFERENCES
A.
AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
B.
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
C.
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
D.
AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
E.
AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters.
F.
ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
G.
ARI 430 - Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
H.
ARI 435 - Application of Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
I.
ASTMB117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray Apparatus.
J.
NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
K.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
L.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
M.
UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
N.
UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
O.
UL 1995 - Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment.
P.
UL 94 - Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances.
Q.
IBC 2000, 2003 - International Building Code.
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.4
1.5
1.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
R.
NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
S.
NFPA 5000 - Building Construction and Safety Code.
T.
ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Code.
U.
ARI Standard 1060 - Rating Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment.
V.
GSA 2003 Facilities Standard - 5.9 HVAC Systems and Components.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with
current ARI 410 Standard.
B.
Certify air-handling units in accordance with ARI 430.
C.
ISO 9001 Certification.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit unit performance including: capacity, nominal and operating performance.
B.
Submit Mechanical Specifications for unit and accessories describing construction, components and options.
C.
Submit shop drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operation and
service clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations. Indicate unit shipping split
locations, and split dimensions, installation and operating weights including dimensions.
D.
Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
E.
Submit data on electrical requirements. Include safety and start-up instructions.
F.
Submit sound data certified to ARI 260.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Unit shall be manufactured to conform to UL 1995 Standard and shall be listed by either
UL/CUL or ETL. Units shall be provided with listing agency label affixed to unit. In the
event the unit is not UL/CUL or ETL approved, the contractor shall, at his/her expense
provide for a field inspection by a UL/CUL or ETL representative to verify conformance.
If necessary, contractor shall perform modifications to the unit to comply with UL/CUL
or ETL as directed by the representative, at no additional expense to the owner.
B.
Certify air-handling units in accordance with ARI 430. If air-handling units are not certified in accordance with ARI 430, contractor shall be responsible for expenses associated
with testing of units after installation to verify performance of fan(s). Any costs incurred
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
to adjust fans to meet scheduled capacities shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
C.
1.7
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.
B.
Units shall ship fully assembled up to practical shipping and rigging limitations. Units
not shipped fully assembled shall have tags and airflow arrows on each section to indicate
location and orientation in direction of airflow. Shipping splits shall be clearly defined on
submittal drawings. Cost associated with non-conformance to shop drawings shall be the
responsibility of the manufacturer. Each section shall have lifting lugs or shipping skid to
allow for field rigging and final placement of section.
C.
Deliver units to jobsite with fan motors, sheaves, and belts completely assembled and
mounted in units.
D.
Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
START-UP AND OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.9
Certify air-handling coils in accordance with ARI 410. If air-handling coils are not certified in accordance with ARI 410, contractor shall be responsible for expenses associated
with testing of coils after installation to verify performance of coil(s). Any costs incurred
to adjust coils to meet scheduled capacities shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor.
Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean,
filters in place, bearings lubricated , condensate properly trapped, piping connections verified and leak-tested, belts aligned and tensioned, all shipping braces removed, bearing
set screws torqued, and fan has been test run under observation.
WARRANTY
A.
The equipment manufacturer shall provide, at no additional cost, a standard parts warranty that covers a period of one year from unit start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first. This warrants that all products are free from defects in material and
workmanship and shall meet the capacities and ratings set forth in the equipment manufacturer's catalog and bulletins.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer must clearly define any exceptions made to Plans and Specifications. Any
deviations in layout or arrangement shall be submitted to consulting engineer prior to bid
date. Acceptance of deviation(s) from specifications shall be in the form of written approval from the consulting engineer. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for expenses
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
that occur due to exceptions made.
B.
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
GENERAL
A.
2.3
McQuay: Skyline
Trane: M Series Modular Climate Changer
York: Approved Equal
Unit layout and configuration shall be as defined in project plans and schedule.
UNIT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Fabricate unit with heavy gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners. All panels, access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type gasket. Shipped loose gasketing is not allowed.
B.
Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; thermal broke
double wall assembly, injected with foam insulation with an R-value of not less than R13.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
The outer panel shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel.
The inner liner shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel.
The floor plate shall be constructed as specified for the inner liner.
Unit will be furnished with solid inner liners.
A sound baffle shall be secured to the inner liner and constructed of G90 galvanized perforated steel filled with 3lb. per cu ft. density, neoprene coated glass fiber insulation.
Sound baffles shall be provided in the following sections of the unit:
1.
2.
3.
Supply and return fan sections
Access section and inlet plenum upstream of return fan
Access section upstream of the supply fan section
D.
Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum
5 inches of positive or 6 inches of negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured
at the panel midpoint.
E.
The casing leakage rate shall not exceed .5 cfm per square foot of cabinet area at 5 inches
of positive static pressure or 6 inches of negative static pressure (.0025 m3/s per square
meter of cabinet area at 1.24 kPa static pressure).
F.
Module to module field assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeter internal splice joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minimize on-site labor and meet indoor air quality standards.
G.
Access doors shall be a minimum of 20 inches wide and 60 inches high (or full height of
unit) and shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two six inch long stainless steel piano-type hinges, latch and full size handle assembly. Access doors shall
swing outward for unit sections under negative pressure. Access doors on positive pressure sections, shall have a secondary latch to relieve pressure and prevent injury upon access.
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
H.
A 6-inch formed G60 galvanized steel base rail shall be provided by the unit manufacturer for structural rigidity and condensate trapping.. The base rail shall be constructed with
12-gauge nominal for unit sizes 003 - 035 and 10-gauge nominal for unit sizes 040 - 090.
The following calculation shall determine the required height of the baserail to allow for
adequate drainage unless a larger size is required for rigging purposes. Use the largest
pressure to determine base rail height. [(Negative)(Positive) static pressure (in)] (2) + 4”
= required baserail height.
I.
Roof curb kit of 16-inch height shall provide support for the air handler on the building
roof and provide a weather protected area for terminating and securing the roof membrane. The roof curb kit shall be manufactured by the air handler unit manufacturer.
J.
Provide cross broke roofcap system to divert water from the top surface of the air handler. The rain shed roofcap shall have 2” standing seams covered with splice cap channel
to seal the top seam. Splice cap shall break down over sides of standing seam to protect
the ends of the seam.
1.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Cooling coil piping vestibule 24” deep shall be factory installed of standard cabinet construction on the coil connection side of the unit. Roofcap over vestibule
shall be a continuous single piece covering both the coil section and the vestibule. Roofcap seams between coil section and vestibule are not allowed.
FANS
A.
Fan sections shall employ plenum fans with a minimum ACMA Construction Class of II.
Class III fan construction shall be used if the fan characteristic curve extends to within
10% of the fan’s Class II selection zone. Fan shafts shall be solid, coated with a rustinhibiting coating, and properly designed so that fan shaft does not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated RPM. All fans shall be statically and dynamically
tested by the manufacturer for vibration and alignment as an assembly at the operating
RPM to meet design specifications. If fans are not factory-tested for vibration and alignment, the contractor shall be responsible for cost and labor associated with field balancing and certified vibration performance. Fan wheels shall be keyed to fan shafts to prevent slipping.
B.
Provide grease lubricated ball bearings selected for L-10 200,000-hour average life per
ANSI/AFBMA 9. Greasable bearings shall have lubrication lines extended to the drive
side of the unit. Lubrication lines shall be a clear, high-pressure, polymer to aid in visual
inspection. Extend both grease lubrication lines to drive side of unit and rigidly attach to
drive side bearing support with Zerk fittings. If extended lubrication lines are not provided, manufacturer shall provide permanently lubricated bearing with engineering calculations for proof of bearing life.
C.
Fans shall be mounted on steel base rail isolation bases. Internally-mounted motor shall
be on the same isolation base. Fan and motor shall be internally isolated with 1.5 inch
minimum deflection spring isolators. In addition to fans and motors being internally isolated, the entire unit shall also be externally isolated from the building, including supply
and return duct work, piping, and electrical connections. External isolation shall be furnished by the installing contractor in order to avoid transmission of noise and vibration
through the ductwork and building structure. Refer to Specification Section 230548 “Vibration Controls for HVAC”.
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
D.
Fan modules shall have a minimum of one access door located on the drive side of the
unit to allow inspection and maintenance of the fan, motor, and drive components. Provide interior marine light with convenient receptacle.
E.
Belts shall be enclosed as required by OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910 to protect worker
from accidental contact with the belts and sheaves.
F.
MOTORS AND DRIVES
1.
2.
3.
4.
All motors and drives shall be factory-installed and run tested. All motors shall
be installed on a slide base to permit adjustment of belt tension. Slide base shall
be designed to accept all motor sizes offered by the air-handler manufacturer for
that fan size to allow a motor change in the future, should airflow requirements
change. Fan sections without factory-installed motors shall have motors field installed by the installing contractor. The installing contractor shall be responsible
for all costs associated with installation of motor, drive, and starter, alignment of
sheaves and belts, run testing of the motor, and balancing of the assembly.
Fan Motors shall be heavy duty, ODP, premium efficiency (93% minimum), operable at 208/60/3.
Motors shall be selected to operate continuously at 104 F (40 C) ambient without
tripping of overloads. Motors shall have a +/- 10 percent voltage utilization range
to protect against voltage variation. Motors shall be in compliance with EPACT
when applicable.
Manufacturer shall provide for each fan a nameplate with the following information to assist air balance contractor in start-up and service personnel in
maintenance:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
5.
2.5
Fan and motor sheave part number
Fan and motor bushing part number
Number of belts and belt part numbers
Fan design RPM and motor HP
Belt tension and deflection
Center distance between shafts
Refer to section 230513 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
for additional requirements.
COOLING AND HEATING COILS
A.
Certification: Acceptable water cooling, water heating, steam, and refrigerant coils shall
be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 and bear the ARI label. Coils exceeding the scope of the manufacturer’s certification and/or the range of ARI’s standard rating
conditions will be considered provided the manufacturer is a current member of the ARI
Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils certification programs and that the
coils have been rated in accordance with ARI Standard 410. Manufacturer must be ISO
9002 certified.
B.
Provide piping vestibule made of the same panel and roof construction as the unit casing.
C.
Provide cooling coils as specified with performance as scheduled. Coils shall not exceed
8 rows or 450 feet per minute face velocity. Coils shall be a maximum of 10 feet long by
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
3-1/2 feet high and be capable of replacement without major rigging. Provide access to
coil(s) for service and cleaning. Enclose coil headers and return bends fully within unit
casing. Unit shall be provided with coil connections that extend a minimum of 5” beyond
unit casing for ease of installation. Drain and vent connections shall be provided exterior
to unit casing. Coil connections must be factory sealed with grommets on interior and
exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage and condensation inside panel assembly. If
not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coil connection grommets and sleeves.
Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary surface. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing
surface for tube to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid flow requirements.
Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.035 inch nominal tube wall
thickness, expanded into fins, brazed at joints. Soldered U-bends shall be provided to minimize the effects of erosion and premature failure having a minimum
tube wall thickness of .025 inches.
Coil connections shall be seamless copper silver soldered to tubes with red brass
coil connections with MPT connection silver soldered to header. Each headershall contain a ¼” FPT drain and vent tapping. Fins shall be 0.10” thick die
formed aluminum. Fin density shall not exceed 10 fins per inch. Connection size
to be determined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting.
Vent and drain fittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air
handler. Vent connections provided at the highest point to assure proper venting.
Drain connections shall be provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up.
Coil casing shall be a formed channel frame of galvanized steel.
BASE-LEVEL DRAIN PANS
A.
Insulation shall be encased between exterior and interior walls. Units with cooling coils
shall have drain pans under complete cooling coil section that extend beyond the airleaving side of the coil to ensure capture of all condensate in section. Cooling coil drain
pans shall be sloped in 2 planes, pitched toward drain connections to ensure complete
condensate drainage when unit is installed level and trapped per manufacturer's requirements. See section 2.05 for specifications on intermediate drain pans between cooling
coils.
B.
Units with heating coils shall have a drain pan under complete heating coil section sloped
in 2 planes and pitched toward drain connections to ensure proper drainage during cleaning and to capture water in the event of a coil failure.
C.
All drain pan connections supplied by unit manufacturer including, piping, and piping
connections extending from stainless steel drain pans shall be constructed of stainless
steel. The contractor is responsible to ensure the unit is installed level, trapped in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements, and visually inspected to ensure proper drainage of condensate.
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.7
2.8
2.9
D.
Flat drain pans shall be acceptable in sections that may have incidental, but not continuous contact with moisture. Flat drain pans shall be accessible for cleaning.
E.
Construct drain pans from stainless steel with cross break and double sloping pitch to
drain connection. Provide drain pans under cooling coil section. Drain connection centerline shall be a minimum of 3’’ above the base rail to aid in proper condensate trapping.
Drain connections that protrude from the base rail are not acceptable. There must be a
full 2’’ thickness of insulation under drain pan.
FILTERS
A.
Provide factory-fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as unit casings.
B.
Air filters shall consist of box or cartridge type filters and shall consist of (1) 30% (Merv
8) pre-filter followed by (1) 85% (Merv 13) final filter. Filters shall be side loading to
avoid the use of filter clips.
C.
Filter media shall be UL 900 listed, Class I.
D.
Manufacturer shall provide one set of startup filters.
DAMPERS
A.
All dampers shall be internally mounted. Dampers shall be premium ultra-low leak and
and thermally insulated. Dampers shall be Tampco series 9000 thermally insulated, airfoil design or equivalent for minimal air leakage (Leakage Class 1A at 1 in w.g.). and
pressure drop. All leakage testing and pressure ratings shall be based on AMCA Publication 500. Manufacturer shall submit brand and model of damper(s) being furnished.
B.
Two position dampers shall be parallel blade action. Modulating dampers shall be opposed blade action.
ROOF CURBS
A.
Roof curbs with integral sound attenuators shall be provided. Contractor shall install 2”
of rigid fiberglass insulation beneath the curb to minimize any breakout sound through
the roof deck. Fans shall be isolated in accordance with Specification Section 230548
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." Curb shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.10
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
1” insulation
Wood Nailer
12 gauge steel
Inline supply and return sound attenuators factory installed in roof curb
ACCESS SECTIONS
A.
24”min. access section between upstream and downstream of chilled water coils for in-
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
spection and cleaning of the unit drain pan, coils and fans sections shall be provided.
Procedure for proper access, inspection and cleaning of the unit shall be included in the
maintenance manual.
2.11
2.12
ADDITIONAL SECTIONS
A.
Access sections shall be provided for access between components.
B.
Economizer section shall be provided with right side outside air opening and end return
air opening and left side exhaust air opening with parallel low leak airfoil damper blades
as specified in Section 2.8. Refer to drawings for exact configuration.
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROLS
A.
Fan motors shall be manufacturer provided and installed, Open Drip Proof, premium efficiency (meets or exceeds EPAct requirements), 1750 RPM, single speed, 208V / 60HZ /
3P. Complete electrical characteristics for each fan motor shall be as shown in equipment schedule.
B.
Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities,
sizes, and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
C.
Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance.
D.
Unit shall be furnished with factory installed marine lights in each accessible section and
a GFI receptacle in each fan sections. Lights and receptacles shall be factory wired to
outdoor rated switches on the exterior of the cabinet at each light/receptacle location.
Electrical contractor shall furnish and install 120V power to each switch in the field.
E.
Air Handling Unit Manufacturer shall furnish Variable Frequency Controllers for supply
and return fans integral with unit. Where unit size allows, controllers shall be factory
installed, otherwise they shall be furnished to the contractor for field installation.
Contractor shall coordinate with all Division 23 vendors to furnish one manufacturer for
the variable frequency controllers to ease maintenance and training for the Owner.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
2.
3.
ABB
Schneider Altivar
Yaskawa
Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete
unit and arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3phase induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency. Equipment
motors shall be matched to the drive so that stable operation and avoidance of
overheating at low speeds can be realized. Refer to section 230513 “Common
Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment”.
Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency
throughout voltage range.
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
5.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
VFD shall be furnished with integral fused disconnect switch.
Unit Operating Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
6.
7.
Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1
speed range.
Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
9.
10.
11.
Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.
Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.
Self-Protection and Reliability Features:
1.
2.
8.
Input ac voltage tolerance of 208 V, plus or minus 5 percent.
Input frequency tolerance of 06/11 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.
Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.
Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent.
Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0
times the base load current for 3 seconds.
Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.
Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.
Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors.
Undervoltage and overvoltage trips; inverter overtemperature, overload,
and overcurrent trips.
Adjustable motor overload relays capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class 20
performance.
Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load
combination at a natural frequency of the combination.
Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.
Loss-of-phase protection.
Reverse-phase protection.
Short-circuit protection.
Motor overtemperature fault.
Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on
return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset
or fault correction. Bidirectional autospeed search shall be capable of starting
into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in
proper direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load.
Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a
power interruption until motor has stopped.
Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5
times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at
slow speeds.
Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back
based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fanventilated motors at slow speeds.
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
12.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Line Conditioning and Filtering: Include internal mounted components to
mitigate harmonic distortion, provide protection from input transients and reduce
EMI/RFI emissions as required for each application. At a minimum, drives shall
include the following:
a.
The VFD shall have internal 5% impedance reactors to reduce the
harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients.
(i)
(ii)
b.
13.
15.
Power on.
Run.
Overvoltage.
Line fault.
Overcurrent.
External fault.
Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches
with manual-speed-control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.
Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller
door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
16.
EMI/RFI filters: All VFDs shall include EMI/RFI filters. The onboard
filters shall allow the VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall
meed product standard IEC/EN 61800-3 for the First Environment
restricted level with up to 100 feet of motor cable.
Door-mounted LED status lights shall indicate the following conditions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
14.
The 5% impedance may be from dual (positive and negative DC bus)
reactors, or 5% AC line reactors.
VFD’s with only one DC reactor shall add an AC line reactor.
Output frequency (Hertz).
Motor speed (rpm).
Motor status (running, stop, fault).
Motor current (amperes).
Motor torque (percent).
Fault or alarming status (code).
Proportional-integral-derivative (PID) feedback signal (percent).
DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
Set-point frequency (Hertz).
Motor output voltage (volts).
Control Signal Interface (Coordinate with Controls Vendor):
a.
b.
Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to
10 V or 0/4-20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs.
Remote signal inputs capable of accepting any of the following speedsetting input signals from the control system:
(i)
(ii)
0 to 10-V dc.
0-20 or 4-20 mA.
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 11
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
c.
Output signal interface with a minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20
mA), which can be programmed to any of the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
d.
Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.
Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
RS485.
Keypad display for local hand operation.
Output frequency (Hertz).
Output current (load).
DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
Motor torque (percent).
Motor speed (rpm).
Set-point frequency (Hertz).
Remote indication interface with a minimum of 2 dry circuit relay
outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:
(i) Motor running.
(ii) Set-point speed reached.
(iii) Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent).
(iv) High- or low-speed limits reached.
17.
Communications (Coordinate with Controls Vendor): RS-485 interface (or as
required by controls manufacturer) allows VFC to be used with an external
system within a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all
parameter settings of VFC to be programmed via BMS control. Provide
capability for VFC to retain these settings within the nonvolatile memory.
a.
12.
Integral Disconnecting Means: Door Interlocked, pad lockable, input
power NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker that will
disconnect all input power from the drive and all internally mounted
options.
Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless otherwise
indicated.
Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches:
NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.
Standard Displays:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
Output frequency (Hertz).
Set-point frequency (Hertz).
Motor current (amperes).
DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
Motor torque (percent).
Motor speed (rpm).
Motor output voltage (volts).
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 12
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation.
Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Examine roughing-in for steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and
electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
2.
Install air-handling units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with
requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-inPlace Concrete." and on structural drawings.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in
Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
B.
Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and
maintenance.
C.
Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place.
temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.
D.
Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages
on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter
banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.
3.3
Replace
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.
D.
Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/4, ASTM B 88, Type M copper tubing. Extend
to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install
cleanouts at changes in direction.
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 13
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
E.
Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 232113
"Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." Install shutoff valve and
union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at
each coil return connection.
F.
Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water, and test coils and
connections for leaks.
Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks.
Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D.
Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass
tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.
Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing
operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.
Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factoryrecommended lubricants.
Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone.
Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow.
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 14
Burns Engineering, Inc.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain
minimum outdoor-air setting.
Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.
Install new, clean filters.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected duct systems are in fully open position.
Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Replace
fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B.
Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"
for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
3.8
After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and
air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally
to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers,
coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.
END OF SECTION 237413
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 15
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
MODULAR ROOFTOP AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237323 - 16
Burns Engineering. Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate
evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of
capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,
and electrical characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
C.
1.4
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Field quality-control reports.
B.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
238126 - 1
Burns Engineering. Inc.
1.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance:
1.
2.
C.
1.7
Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard
for Refrigeration Systems."
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor
Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and
Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 033000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with
actual equipment provided.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fails in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period:
a.
b.
c.
For Compressor: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion.
For Parts: five years from date of Substantial Completion.
For Labor: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis of design: Mitsubishi Electric and Electronics USA, Inc. or approved equal.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc
SANYO North America Corporation; SANYO Fisher Company.
Daiken
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
238126 - 2
Burns Engineering. Inc.
2.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
INDOOR UNITS (1.5 Tons)
A.
Wall-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in standard color, and
discharge drain pans with drain connection.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermalexpansion valve. Comply with ARI 210/240.
Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.
Fan Motors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
6.
Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent
lubrication.
Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections.
Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
a.
Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.
b.
Provide condensate pump with unit. Size condensate pump for minimum 2.6 GPH
15 ft. discharge head.
Air Filtration Section:
a.
General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:
1)
2)
3)
b.
Disposable Panel Filters:
1)
2.3
Comply with NFPA 90A.
Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and MERV according
to ASHRAE 52.2.
Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access
doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or
lifted out from access plenum.
Washable, anit-mold.
OUTDOOR UNITS (1.5 Tons)
A.
Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:
1.
Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable
panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.
Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
238126 - 3
Burns Engineering. Inc.
2.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration
isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload
devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Compressor Type: Scroll.
Single-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and
automatic-reset low-pressure switch.
c.
Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.
d.
Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and
liquid subcooler. Comply with ARI 210/240.
Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 230923 "Direct Digital
Control (DDC) System for HVAC" and Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC
DDC."
B.
Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
C.
Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan,
with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compressor time delay.
24-hour time control of system stop and start.
Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
Fan-speed selection including auto setting.
D.
Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
E.
Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
F.
Drain Hose: For condensate.
G.
Additional Monitoring:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Monitor constant and variable motor loads.
Monitor variable-frequency-drive operation.
Monitor economizer cycle.
Monitor cooling load.
Monitor air distribution static pressure and ventilation air volumes.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
238126 - 4
Burns Engineering. Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb.
B.
Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C.
Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified on
structural drawings.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
D.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
238126 - 5
Burns Engineering. Inc.
3.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain units.
END OF SECTION 238126
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
238126 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
VFC: Variable frequency controller.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of product.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site shall not be
used.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Southwire Company
American Insulated Wire Corp
General Cable Corporation
Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division
Senator Wire and Cable Company
D.
Copper Conductors: Single, annealed, conductor, insulated wire; 98% conductivity at 20
degrees C. Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
E.
Conductor Insulation: 600V, 90 degrees C. Thermoplastic – dual rated Type THHN-2-THWN2 and Type XHHW-2. Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for.
2.2
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Provide product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ilsco
Tyco
3M
Polaris
Elastimold
C.
Description: UL-Listed, factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating,
material, type, and class for application and service indicated. Cable termination lugs shall be
compression type.
D.
All splices, including low voltage or Class 2 wiring, shall be made in suitable enclosures or
boxes.
E.
T-tap splices: Not permitted.
2.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A.
Feeders and branch circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10
AWG and larger.
B.
Control and communication circuits: Use stranded conductor.
3.2
CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND
WIRING METHODS
A.
Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2,
single conductors in raceway
B.
Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2,
single conductors in raceway
C.
Feeders in Cable Tray:
Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or
Type XHHW-2, single conductors larger than No. 1/0 AWG
D.
Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces:
Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single
conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC or Metal-clad cable, Type MC
E.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single
conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC or Metal-clad cable, Type MC
F.
Feeder and branch circuits in High Temperature Areas: Type V, Type FEB, Type TFE, Type
SA or Type Z as required.
G.
Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
C.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
E.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
F.
Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
B.
Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced
conductors.
C.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
B.
Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of
conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
3.7
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.8
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration
Firestopping."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
D.
1.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Procedures used.
Results that comply with requirements.
Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.
B.
Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special
applications:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Underground distribution grounding.
Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.
Foundation steel electrodes.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in
"Field Quality Control" Article.
B.
Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.
ERICO International Corporation.
ILSCO.
O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
2.3
CONDUCTORS
A.
Insulated Conductors:
Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required
by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Bare Copper Conductors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8
inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross
section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall
comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested
at 5000 V.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
CONNECTORS
A.
Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items
connected.
B.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.
C.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
D.
Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire
terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 12 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for
No. 10 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum.
1.
Bury at least 24 inches below grade.
C.
Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,
with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two
bands of yellow.
D.
Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1.
2.
E.
Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches
above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top
of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.
Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those
required by NFPA 70:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Feeders and branch circuits.
Lighting circuits.
Receptacle circuits.
Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
Flexible raceway runs.
Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
C.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to ductmounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters,
dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to
air duct and connected metallic piping.
D.
Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Anti-frost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
E.
Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway
fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a
separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B.
Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and
UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system
ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical
service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode
conductor, and install in conduit.
C.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1.
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate
any adjacent parts.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
3.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection
is required, use a bolted clamp.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1.
2.
3.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of
the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
E.
Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond
across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
F.
Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner
column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,
electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
a.
b.
3.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural ground resistance.
Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order,
and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and
their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena
that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
E.
Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
G.
Report measured ground resistances. Completed grounding system shall meet the following
values:
1.
2.
H.
Data Center or other IT installations: Less than 1 ohm.
Low-Voltage Building Service (500 kVA or less): Less than 10 ohms.
Testing of the system shall be documented as part of the construction turnover materials, to
verify conformance to design performance requirements. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Perform a megger test using the “Fall-of-Potential Method” to determine that the proper
ground resistance has been achieved, and submit a written report of the megger test of
ground resistance. Ensure that sufficient spacing between the test set current probe and
the grounding electrode under test is achieved.
Perform ground fault protection system functional testing for each 480-volt switchboard
having ground fault protection and for any generator system.
Perform ground continuity and functional tests:
a.
b.
c.
d.
I.
From main switchgear to grounding electrode and/or cold water main.
Between each main secondary feeder switchboard ground and its termination point
(distribution panels, panelboards, motor control centers, UPS systems, electric
heater disconnects, chiller starters, and other such equipment) and all feeders
shown on single-line diagram.
Between each distribution panel to panelboards and between each panelboard to
panelboard (excluding branch circuits).
Test each branch circuit receptacle for proper polarity and ground using a plug-in
test device.
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
Construction requirements for concrete bases.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design:
Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
B.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
C.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
D.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of 4 times the
applied force.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
Steel slotted support systems.
Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
Equipment supports.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1.
2.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
ERICO International Corporation.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
Metallic Coatings:
MFMA-4.
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin
channels and angles with 9/16-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1
surface.
1.
2.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for
use with those items.
Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles.
Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.
C.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
D.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces
as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
F.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints:
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
G.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
b.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2)
2.
b.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Hilti Inc.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a.
3.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Hilti Inc.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength.
Comply with
ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes
and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less
than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1.
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
D.
3.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 11/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above
suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and
RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
D.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
3.3
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers
and nuts, beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69,
Spring-tension clamps.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means
that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
END OF SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
Surface raceways.
Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior
ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.
Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways,
surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and
handholes serving communications systems.
Section 280528 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface
pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.
Section 260553 “Electrical Identification” for conduit identification.
DEFINITIONS
A.
GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
B.
Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
C.
1.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Samples: For wireways, nonmetallic wireways and surface raceways and for each color and
texture specified, 12 inches long.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1.
2.
Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
B.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
C.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their
mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the
Allied Tube & Conduit.
O-Z/Gedney.
Southwire Company.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
Wheatland Tube Company.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D.
EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
E.
FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
F.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
G.
Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1.
2.
Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations:
NFPA 70.
Fittings for EMT:
a.
b.
3.
2.2
Comply with UL 886 and
Material: cast iron or cast steel.
Type: compression for sizes 2-1/2 inches and below and set screws for all conduits
sizes above 2-1/2 inches.
Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated
for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding
jumper.
NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
Anamet Electrical, Inc.
Arnco Corporation.
CANTEX Inc.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Condux International, Inc.
Electri-Flex Company.
Kraloy.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.
RACO; Hubbell.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C.
RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise
indicated.
D.
Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and
material.
E.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,
respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
F.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
Hoffman.
Square D.
Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise
indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1.
Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D.
Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4
NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Allied Moulded Products, Inc.
Hoffman.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C.
Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without
holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with
captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainlesssteel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.
D.
Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on
cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
E.
Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down
straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete
system.
F.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,
respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
G.
Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.5
SURFACE RACEWAYS
A.
Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and
manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect. Product shall comply
with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.6
Wiremold / Legrand
Mono-Systems, Inc.
Panduit Corp.
Wiremold / Legrand
Hubbell Incorporated.
Panduit Corp.
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
EGS/Appleton Electric.
Hoffman.
Hubbell Incorporated.
O-Z/Gedney.
RACO; Hubbell.
Robroy Industries.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
8.
9.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold / Legrand.
B.
General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
gasketed cover.
E.
Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
F.
Metal Floor Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Material: Cast metal.
Type: Fully adjustable.
Shape: Rectangular.
Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.
1.
Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
H.
Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.
Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and
marked for the maximum allowable weight.
I.
Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70
lb.
1.
Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
J.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
K.
Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,
galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover. Boxes shall be located to facilitate the installation of
cables and insure the pulling tension of cables is not exceeded. No more than (3) three 90degree bends between pull boxes or fittigns. Junction/pull boxes and conduit fittings shall be
located so that the capability for future access is maintained. Junction/pull boxes shall not be
located on building expansion joints.
L.
Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as
recessed box.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
M.
Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm
deep).
N.
Gangable boxes are allowed.
O.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge
cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
P.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass.
Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Cabinets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
Key latch to match panelboards.
Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Outdoors Locations, Above Grade:
otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
Apply raceway products as specified below unless
In corrosive environments, Type EPC-80-PVC and compatible fittings.
In non-corrosive environments, GRC.
B.
Wet and Damp Locations: In corrosive environments, use Type EPC-80-PVC and compatible
fittings. In non-corrosive environments, use rigid steel conduit. All roof penetrations shall use
rigid steel conduit.
C.
Dry Locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Switchboard and panelboard feeders: EMT or GRC.
Feeders or branch circuits 100 amps and larger: EMT.
Circuits operating above 600V: Rigid steel conduit.
Exposed conduit in finished areas: Coordinate with Architect.
Equipment Rooms: Install IMC or RGS conduit in rough-use areas like mechanical and
electrical equipment rooms, janitor's closets, etc.
Conduit in Walls: EMT.
Above Ceiling: EMT or MC cable with insulated ground conductor.
Rooftop locations where exposed: RGS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
D.
Hazardous Locations: RGS.
E.
Metal Clad (MC) Cable Installations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Type MC cable installation shall be in accordance with the following: No more than nine
(9) total current-carrying conductors in multiple MC cable runs shall be bundled together
into a single MC cable hanger. Wireway or ladder type tray with dual supports may also
be used to support MC cable with fill as allowed by the NEC. Neutrals shall be counted
as current-carrying conductors. (Not necessary in three phase feeders)
MC cable shall be run parallel or perpendicular to walls. No diagonal runs shall be
permitted.
Maintain a clearance of at least 6 inches from hot water and other high temperature pipes
and telecommunications conduits, and at least 12 inches from unshielded twisted-pair
telecommunications cables.
The arrangement of MC cables and fastening methods shall be subject to the approval of
the University Engineering Department. Securely support all MC cable with cable
hangers, individual spring steel support clips, steel trapeze hangers, threaded rods or
dedicated No. 8 AWG drop wires. Cable supports shall be fastened to concrete slabs,
beams, joists or other structural members of the building. Do not support MC cable on
hung ceilings or on ceiling support wires, or on HVAC ducts, piping, etc. The use of
cable ties to support MC cable is prohibited.
Support MC cable every 6 feet and within 1 foot of every box, panelboard, fitting, or
cable termination.
All MC cables passing through fire-rated walls or electrical/telecommunications room
walls shall be provided with a UL-listed, fire-rated penetration assembly.
Flexible Metal Conduit:
1.
Provide flexible metallic conduits for connections to motors, transformers, and other
electrical equipment when it is subject to movement, vibration, misalignment, cramped
quarters or where noise transmission is to be eliminated or reduced. Do not use flexible
non-metallic conduit. Flexible metallic conduit shall be of the liquid-tight type when
installed under any of the following conditions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Exterior locations.
Moisture or humidity-laden atmospheres where it is possible for condensation to
accumulate.
Corrosive atmospheres.
Where water or spray due to wash-operations is frequent or possible.
Wherever there is a possibility of seepage or dripping of oil, grease or water.
Connections to pumps.
Maximum allowable length is 6 feet.
Minimum allowable length for vibrating equipment is 18 inches.
G.
All other applications not specified herein, use RGS conduit.
H.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
I.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this
type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after
installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and
apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
EMT: Use setscrew for conduit sizes above 2-1/2 inches or compression type for sizes 21/2 inches and below, cast-metal fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
J.
Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
K.
Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
L.
Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
M.
Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.
Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and
number of floors.
B.
Conduits shall be designed to run parallel with the lines of the building. Electrical conduits
shall not be supported on hangers with any other services, pipes, ducts, or other mechanical
systems and shall be supported independently of any ceiling support systems. Related conduits
shall be grouped together and supported from a conduit rack; provide space on rack for 25
percent additional conduits.
C.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
D.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
E.
Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"
for hangers and supports.
F.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
G.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of
changes in direction.
H.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
I.
Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
J.
Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1.
2.
Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.
Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
K.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
L.
Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive
compound prior to assembly.
M.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings
to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
N.
Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
O.
Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
P.
Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in
the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
Q.
Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter
or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
R.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap
underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
S.
Surface Raceways:
1.
2.
T.
Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.
Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section.
Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue
are not acceptable support methods.
Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
U.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
raceways at the following points:
1.
2.
3.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
V.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
W.
Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1.
2.
Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature
change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install
in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental
temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds
100 feet.
Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each
of the following locations:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
X.
Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature
change.
Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg
temperature change.
Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot
of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install
fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of
length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.
Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time
of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of
flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1.
2.
Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
Y.
Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not
individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured
to bottom of box unless otherwise indicated.
Z.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a
rain-tight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 11
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
BB.
Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
CC.
Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
DD. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
EE.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
FF.
Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
3.4
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.5
Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
Comply with
PROTECTION
A.
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1.
2.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 12
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 260544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Sleeve-seal fittings.
Grout.
Silicone sealants.
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fireresistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without
penetrating items.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
A.
Wall Sleeves:
1.
2.
B.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,
plain ends.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure
pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel
sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with
tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260544 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
C.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D.
Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E.
Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with
nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
Minimum Metal Thickness:
a.
b.
2.2
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side
larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more
sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable.
1.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
3M
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
CALPICO, Inc.
Metraflex Company (The).
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Proco Products, Inc.
Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A.
Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in
concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to
match piping OD.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260544 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Presealed Systems.
O-Z/Gedney
Link-seal
GROUT
A.
Description: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-firerated walls or floors.
B.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.5
SILICONE SEALANTS
A.
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces that are not fire rated.
Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit
Floors and Walls:
1.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260544 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly
between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;
protect material while curing.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
Size pipe sleeves to provide minimum 1/4-inch to maximum 1/2-inch annular clear space
between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are
used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush
with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 3 inches above
finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1.
2.
Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved
opening.
Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board
assemblies.
E.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for minimum 1/4-inch to maximum 1/2inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.2
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway
entries into building.
B.
Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or
cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical
sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts
against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.3
SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B.
Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C.
Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260544 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
D.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION 260544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260544 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND
CABLING
260544 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Identification for raceways.
Identification of power and control cables.
Identification for conductors.
Warning labels and signs.
Instruction signs.
Equipment identification labels.
Miscellaneous identification products.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting
provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C.
Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system
components used in identification signs and labels.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E.
Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.5
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes,
standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each raceway size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive
labels.
1.
Label Size: As follows:
a.
b.
2.
2.2
Raceways 1-inch and smaller: 1-1/8 inches high by 4 inches long.
Raceways larger than 1-inch: 1-1/8 inches high by 8 inches long.
Black legend on an orange background.
MEDIUM VOLTAGE AND 480 VOLT FEEDER CABLE TAGS
A.
2.3
Provide phenolic or laminated plastic tags with machine printed legend to suit the application.
Provide black legend on orange background, except as otherwise indicated on project
documents, and eyelet for fastening. Tags shall identify circuit/circuit breaker number,
conductor gauge, and destination (at source location) or source (at destination and intermediate
locations).
POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of
color field for each cable size.
B.
Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant
coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Identify all branch circuit power and all control cables and conductors at splice or pull
boxes, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear or other connected equipment.
Legend: Indicate circuit/circuit breaker number, conductor gauge, and destination (at
source location) or source (at destination and intermediate locations).
UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A.
Tape:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Color and Printing:
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and
locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when
exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
Provide 4-inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored red with suitable warning
legend located 12-inches below grade above all underground conduits and ductbank.
Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.
Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.
1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN
FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
Arc Flash and Shock Warning Signs, on all switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor
control centers, starters, VFDs, transformers, and disconnect switches per NEC article
110:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Voltage (phase to phase)
Available Short Circuit Current (amperes)
Flash Protection Boundary (inches)
Prohibited Shock Approach Boundary (inches)
Limited Shock Approach Boundary (inches)
Arc Flash Evaluation Study Date
Refer to NFPA 70E for proper safety practices and protective equipment
requirements
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A.
Nameplates: Engraved, three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background.
Printed plastic tape labels shall be permitted for use in identifying internal components in
electrical enclosures. Embossed, anodized metal nameplates supplied by manufacturers for
switchgear, transformers, etc., for equipment ratings are acceptable, but these do not circumvent
the need for additional nameplates bearing the project equipment identification. Minimum
letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
B.
Provide nameplates with equipment name and drawing schedule identification for all electrical
equipment including panelboards, cabinets, switchgear, switchboards, starters, and fire alarm
devices. Devices serving a dedicated load shall be identified in a similar manner. Identify the
incoming breakers or switches on high voltage switchgear and fused switch lineups with the
utility or University substation source circuit identification number and location. A schedule or
drawing shall identify proposed nameplates and verbiage, which shall be approved by the
University Engineering Department.
C.
Fasteners for Plastic Laminate and Metal Nameplates: Provide self-tapping stainless steel
screws or No. 10/32 minimum stainless steel machine screws with nuts, and flat and lock
washers. Glue-on or self-adhesive nameplates are not permitted.
2.7
RECEPTACLE IDENTIFICATION
A.
All receptacle cover plates, including laboratory multi-outlet raceway receptacles, shall be
identified as to panel and circuit number; this information shall be identified by means of a
printed self-adhesive label. Label shall be translucent or clear polyester with black lettering,
waterproof, and scratchproof.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.8
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
CABLE TIES
A.
General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6
nylon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight,
self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 350 deg F.
Color: Black.
Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self-locking.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.9
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 350 deg F.
Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.
UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.
Color: Black.
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or
interior).
B.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
E.
Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
F.
Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with
adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.
G.
System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band
shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in
contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,
at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested
areas.
H.
Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or
cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
I.
Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1.
2.
Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
J.
Underground-Line Warning Tape:
During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use
multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete
envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.
K.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation
and paint application.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, more than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4inch-wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of
raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH
VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at
legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that
is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in
the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B.
Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl
labels. Install labels at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.
C.
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch
Circuits More Than 30A, and 120V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in
bands. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
D.
Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and
pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend
and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Emergency Power.
Power.
UPS.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors
listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a.
Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
b.
Phase A: Black.
Phase B: Red.
Phase C: Blue.
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or
taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
F.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesivebacked phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.
G.
Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors
using adhesive-film-type labels.
H.
Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes,
manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor
or cable designation, origin, and destination.
I.
Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations
provide self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor designation.
J.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,
and signal connections.
1.
2.
3.
K.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.
Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in
raceway.
L.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of
access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless
otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in
finished spaces.
M.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Selfadhesive warning labels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
Power transfer switches.
Controls with external control power connections.
N.
Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs
with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
O.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high
letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use
labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure.
Equipment to Be Labeled:
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated
acrylic or melamine label.
Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
Switchgear.
Switchboards.
Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
Substations.
Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
Motor-control centers.
Enclosed switches.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
Enclosed controllers.
Variable-speed controllers.
Push-button stations.
Power transfer equipment.
Contactors.
Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
Power-generating units.
Monitoring and control equipment.
UPS equipment.
END OF SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 10
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Distribution panelboards.
Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
DEFINITIONS
A.
SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
B.
SPD: Surge protective device.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.5
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B.
Field Quality-Control Reports:
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.6
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
1.7
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.8
Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:
Two spares for each panelboard.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
testing.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.9
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B.
Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.
1.10
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations:
1.
2.
Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work
in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a.
b.
B.
Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1.
2.
1.11
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C) to plus 104 deg F
(plus 40 deg C).
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with
concrete.
1.12
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A.
Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B.
Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.
1.
Dead font and rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within
hinged trim cover.
Finishes:
a.
b.
5.
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X.
Panels and Trim: galvanized steel factory finished immediately after cleaning and
pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of
prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
Back Boxes: galvanized steel.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
C.
Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.
D.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1.
2.
E.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1.
2.
3.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
F.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances
required for future installation of devices.
G.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
current available at terminals.
H.
Branch circuit panelboards shall include 10% spare breakers and 20% future spaces.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
I.
2.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SPD shall be provided on all panelboards serving electronic equipment including office
computers and laboratory instrumentation, expect when SPD units has/have already been
provided at some point(s) upstream of the panelboard.
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C.
Mains: Circuit breaker.
D.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:
Bolt-on circuit breakers.
E.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:
Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device
requires mechanical release for removal.
F.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
G.
Distribution panelboards shall provide a minimum of 30% future spaces.
2.3
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C.
Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.
D.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices:
disturbing adjacent units.
E.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
F.
Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box
equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
PANELBOARDS
Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without
262416 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers: Match panelboard and distribution manufacturer.
B.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to
meet available fault currents.
1.
2.
3.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip).
Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault
protection (30-mA trip).
Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240V, single-pole configuration.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.5
Instantaneous trip.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Compression or Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and
conductor materials.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A.
Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective
device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B.
Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.
B.
Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have
been subjected to water saturation.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
C.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
E.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1.
Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
F.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
H.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room
designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements
for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
D.
3.4
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
C.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a.
b.
c.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove
front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
Instruments and Equipment:
1)
D.
3.5
Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record
for device.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573.16 "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
Weather-resistant receptacles.
Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.
Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.
Communications outlets.
Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multi-outlet
assemblies.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C.
Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
F.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordination:
1.
2.
1.5
Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 1
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
B.
Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking
wall plates.
C.
Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
Service/Power Poles: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.
Floor Service-Outlet Assemblies: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.
Poke-Through, Fire-Rated Closure Plugs: One for every five floor service outlets
installed, but no fewer than two.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers' Names:
Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single
source from single manufacturer.
GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 2
Burns Engineering, Inc.
C.
Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted
under the following conditions:
1.
2.
2.3
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.
Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A.
Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4
Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex).
Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).
Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
General Description:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Straight blade, non-feed-through type.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer
provides proper GFCI protection.
Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.5
Cooper; VGF20.
Hubbell; GFR5352L.
Pass & Seymour; 2095.
Leviton; 7590.
TOGGLE SWITCHES
A.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
B.
Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements:
1)
Single Pole:
a)
b)
c)
WIRING DEVICES
Cooper; AH1221.
Hubbell; HBL1221.
Leviton; 1221-2.
262726 - 3
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
d)
2)
Two Pole:
a)
b)
c)
d)
3)
Cooper; AH1223.
Hubbell; HBL1223.
Leviton; 1223-2.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.
Four Way:
a)
b)
c)
d)
2.6
Cooper; AH1222.
Hubbell; HBL1222.
Leviton; 1222-2.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2.
Three Way:
a)
b)
c)
d)
4)
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.
Cooper; AH1224.
Hubbell; HBL1224.
Leviton; 1224-2.
Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.
DECORATOR-STYLE DEVICES
A.
Convenience Receptacles:
Square face, 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1.
B.
GFCI, Non-Feed-Through Type, Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 20 A; comply
with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A.
1.
C.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, Based on Leviton Decora type:
16341 single and 16342 duplex; color chosen by Architect after submittal.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, Based on Leviton Decora type: 8899;
color chosen by Architect after submittal.
Toggle Switches, Square Face, 120/277 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and
FS W-S-896.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
WIRING DEVICES
Cooper; 7621 (single pole), 7623 (three way).
Hubbell; DS120 (single pole), DS320 (three way).
Leviton; 5621-2 (single pole), 5623-2 (three way).
Pass & Seymour; 2621 (single pole), 2623 (three way).
262726 - 4
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.7
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
WALL PLATES
A.
Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.8
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with white baked enamel, suitable for field painting.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed
and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weatherresistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A.
Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B.
Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C.
Service Plate: Round, die-cast aluminum with satin finish.
D.
Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for
UTP cable complying with requirements in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal
Cabling."
2.9
POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
Pass & Seymour/Legrand.
Square D/Schneider Electric.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold/Legrand.
Description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor serviceoutlet assembly.
Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements.
Service-Outlet Assembly: Flush type with two simplex receptacles and space for two RJ45 jacks complying with requirements in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal
Cabling."
Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch (75-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to floor
thickness.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 5
Burns Engineering, Inc.
5.
6.
7.
2.10
A.
Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.
Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3-inch (75-mm) cored openings and reestablish
fire rating of floor.
Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors
and a minimum of two, four-pair cables that comply with requirements in Section 271500
"Communications Horizontal Cabling."
PREFABRICATED MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
B.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
Wiremold/Legrand.
Description:
1.
2.
Two-piece surface metal raceway, with factory-wired multi-outlet harness.
Components shall be products from single manufacturer designed for use as a complete,
matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
C.
Raceway Material: Metal, finish color to be chosen by architect after submittal.
D.
Multi-outlet Harness:
1.
2.
2.11
A.
Receptacles: 20-A, 125-V, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R receptacles complying
with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
Wiring: No. 12 AWG solid, Type THHN copper, single circuit.
SERVICE POLES
Description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Factory-assembled and -wired units to extend power and voice and data communication
from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near floor.
Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch- (65-mm-) square cross section, with height adequate to extend
from floor to at least 6 inches (150 mm) above ceiling, and with separate channels for
power wiring and voice and data communication cabling.
Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection
to ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment.
Finishes: Finish color to be chosen by architect after submittal.
Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors and a
minimum of four, four-pair, Category 3 or Category 5 voice and data communication
cables.
Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20-A, straight-blade receptacles complying with
requirements in this Section.
Voice and Data Communication Outlets: Two RJ-45 jacks complying with requirements
in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 6
Burns Engineering, Inc.
2.12
A.
FINISHES
Device Color:
1.
2.
B.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by architect unless
otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.
Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Decorator style devices shall be installed in all finished spaces, including but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Classrooms
Offices
Lobby
Corridors
Meeting Rooms
IDF and MDF spaces
Bathrooms
Surface mount devices installed in unfinished space block walls, including but not limited to:
1.
2.
Mechanical spaces
Electrical spaces
D.
See Section 26-0533 - “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for device box
requirements.
E.
Coordination with Other Trades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device
boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside
of boxes.
Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,
paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and
cables.
Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
Conductors:
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 7
Burns Engineering, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated
on devices.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
Existing Conductors:
a.
b.
c.
G.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
Device Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
H.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment.
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)
in length.
When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal
screw.
Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
Receptacle Orientation:
1.
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right.
I.
Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
J.
Dimmers:
1.
2.
3.
K.
Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multi-gang wall plates.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 8
Burns Engineering, Inc.
L.
3.2
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and
furnishings.
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
3.3
Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is
not required.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Identify each wiring device with associated branch circuit panelboard and circuit number – use
pre-printed pressure sensitive labels.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
2.
B.
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 114 to 126 V.
Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 3 percent or higher is unacceptable.
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
C.
Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 9
Burns Engineering, Inc.
Rowan University
Bozorth Hall HVAC Replacement – Phase 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 10